Home

Panasonic kx-tgp500 Cordless Telephone User Manual

1. Category Parameter Name Ref REG _INTERVAL_RATE_ 1 8 Page 181 SIP_SESSION TIME 1 8 Page 181 TOS SIP_ 1 8 Page 181 SIP_2NDPROXY_ADDR_ 1 8 Page 183 SIP_2NDPROXY_PORT_ 1 8 Page 184 SIP_2NDRGSTR_ADDR_ 1 8 Page 184 SIP_2NDRGSTR_PORT_ 1 8 Page 184 SIP_TIMER T1_ 1 8 Page 184 SIP_TIMER T2_ 1 8 Page 185 INVITE _RTXN_ 1 8 Page 185 OTHER_RTXN_ 1 8 Page 185 SIP_FOVR_NORSP_ 1 8 Page 186 SIP_FOVR_MAX 1 8 Page 186 SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_ 1 8 Page 186 SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_ 1 8 Page 187 SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_ 1 8 Page 187 SIP_100REL_ENABLE 1 8 Page 188 SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_ 1 8 Page 188 SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_ 1 8 Page 188 SIP_PRSNC_PORT_ 1 8 Page 189 SIP_2NDPRSNC ADDR_ 1 8 Page 189 SIP_2NDPRSNC_PORT_ 1 8 Page 189 USE_DEL_REG OPEN 1 8 Page 189 USE_DEL_REG CLOSE_ 1 8 Page 190 PORT _PUNCH_INTVL_ 1 8 Page 190 SIP_SUBS EXPIRE 1 8 Page 190 SUB_RTX_INTVL_ 1 8 Page 191 REG _RTX_INTVL_ 1 8 Page 191 SIP_P PREFERRED ID 1 8 Page 191 SIP_PRIVACY_ 1 8 Page 192 ADD_USER_PHONE_ 1 8 Page 192 SDP_USER_ID_ 1 8 Page 192 SUB_INTERVAL RATE 1 8 Page 192 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 131 4 2 1 Configuration File Specifications Category Parameter Name Ref SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_ 1 8 Page 193 SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_ 1 8 Page 193 SIP_TRANSPORT_ 1 8 Page 193 SIP_ANM DISPNAME 1 8 Page 194 SIP_ANM USERNAME 1 8 Page 19
2. Description Selects the interval in milliseconds between transmissions of RTP packets Value Range e 20 e 30 e 40 Default Value 20 Configuration File Reference RTP_PTIME Page 173 Minimum RTP Port Number Description Specifies the lowest port number that the unit will use for RTP packets Note s If port numbers are specified in Channel 1 3 in 3 4 5 3 External RTP Port this setting is ignored and the corresponding external RTP port is enabled Value Range 1024 48750 even number only Note The value for this setting must be less than or equal to Maximum RTP Port Number 400 Default Value 16000 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 91 3 6 4 VoIP Settings Line 1 Line 8 Configuration File Reference RTP_PORT_MIN Page 173 Maximum RTP Port Number Description Specifies the highest port number that the unit will use for RTP packets Note e If port numbers are specified in Channel 1 3 in 3 4 5 3 External RTP Port this setting is ignored and the corresponding external RTP port is enabled Value Range 1424 49150 even number only Note The value for this setting must be greater than or equal to Minimum RTP Port Number 400 Default Value 20000 Configuration File Reference RTP_PORT_MAX Page 173 3 6 4 VoIP Settings Line 1 Line 8 This screen allows you to change the VoIP settin
3. Configuration File Reference STATIC_SUBNET Page 152 Default Gateway Description Specifies the IP address of the default gateway for the network where the unit is connected Note e This setting is available only when Connection Mode is set to Static Value Range Max 15 characters n n n n n 0 255 except 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 127 0 0 1 etc Default Value Not stored Phone User Interface Reference Configuring Settings from the Base Unit KX TGP550 only Handset Page 15 Configuration File Reference STATIC_GATEWAY Page 152 DNS1 64 Description Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server Note This setting is available only when Connection Mode is set to Static Value Range Max 15 characters n n n n n 0 255 except 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 127 0 0 1 etc Default Value Not stored Phone User Interface Reference Configuring Settings from the Base Unit KX TGP550 only Handset Page 15 Configuration File Reference USER_DNS1_ADDR Page 153 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 4 2 Ethernet Port Settings DNS2 Description Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server Note This setting is available only when Connection Mode is set to Static Value Range Max 15 characters n n n n n 0 255 except 0 0 0 0
4. Default Value Not applicable 3 4 Network This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the Network tab 3 4 1 Basic Network Settings This screen allows you to change basic network settings such as whether to use a DHCP server and the IP address of the unit Note e Changes to the settings on this screen are applied when the message Complete appears after clicking Save Because the IP address of the unit will probably be changed if you change these settings you will not be able to continue using the Web user interface To continue configuring the unit from the Web user interface log in to the Web user interface again after confirming the newly assigned IP address of the unit using the phone user interface In addition if the IP address of the PC from which you try to access the Web user interface has been changed close the Web port once by selecting Tore Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 61 3 4 1 Basic Network Settings for Embedded web on the base unit KX TGP550 only or handset gt see Opening Closing the Web Port in 3 2 1 Before Accessing the Web User Interface Panasonic KX TGP550T04 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance Basic Network Settings Network Basic network settings Connection Mode DHCP Static Ethernet Port Settings DHCP Settings Host Name TGP5nn Receive DNS server address automatically D Use the
5. Description Specifies the amount of time in minutes to change the time when Enable DST Enable Summer Time is set to Yes Value Range 0 720 Default Value 60 Configuration File Reference DST_OFFSET Page 136 78 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 5 5 Time Adjust Settings 3 5 5 5 Start Day and Time of DST Start Day and Time of Summer Time Month Description Selects the month in which DST Summer Time starts Value Range e January e February e March e April e May e June e July August e September October e November e December Default Value March Configuration File Reference DST_START_MONTH Page 137 Day of Week Using the 2 following settings specify on which day of the selected month DST Summer Time starts For example to specify the second Sunday select Second and Sunday Description Selects the number of the week on which DST Summer Time starts Value Range e First Second e Third Fourth e Last Default Value Second Configuration File Reference DST_START_ORDINAL_DAY Page 137 Description Selects the day of the week on which DST Summer Time starts Value Range e Sunday e Monday e Tuesday e Wednesday e Thursday e Friday e Saturday Default Value Sunday Configuration File Reference DST_START_DAY_OF_WEEK Page 137 Document V
6. Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 129 4 1 Configuration File Parameter List Category Parameter Name Ref RTP Settings TOS SES 1 8 Page 170 RTCP_INTVL_ 1 8 Page 171 MAX DELAY_ 1 8 Page 171 MIN DELAY_ 1 8 Page 172 NOM DELAY_ 1 8 Page 172 RTP_PORT_MIN Page 173 RTP_PORT_MAX Page 173 RTP_PTIME Page 173 Miscellaneous VoIP Settings OUTBANDDTMF_ 1 8 Page 174 TELEVENT_PTYPE_ 1 8 Page 174 RFC2543 HOLD ENABLE 1 8 Page 174 1 This setting can also be configured through the Web user interface Line Settings Category Parameter Name Ref Call Control Settings VM_NUMBER_ 1 8 Page 175 DIAL PLAN 1 8 Page 175 DIAL PLAN NOT MATCH ENABLE 1 8 Page 176 SHARED CALL ENABLE 1 8 Page 176 SHARED _USER_ID_ 1 8 Page 177 SYNCHRONIZATION ENABLE 1 8 Page 177 PRIVACY MODE _ 1 8 Page 177 SIP Settings SIP_USER_AGENT Page 178 SIP_AUTHID_ 1 8 Page 178 SIP_PASS_ 1 8 Page 179 SIP_SRC_PORT_ 1 8 Page 179 SIP_PRXY_ADDR_ 1 8 Page 179 SIP_PRXY_PORT_ 1 8 Page 180 SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_ 1 8 Page 180 SIP_RGSTR_PORT_ 1 8 Page 180 SIP_SVCDOMAIN_ 1 8 Page 180 REG EXPIRE TIME 1 8 Page 181 130 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 4 1 Configuration File Parameter List
7. IP address in dotted decimal notation 154 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 4 4 3 Ethernet Port Settings Default Value Empty string 4 4 3 Ethernet Port Settings VLAN_ENABLE KX TGP550 only Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to use the VLAN feature to perform VoIP communication securely Note e This setting is available only when NW_SETTING ENABLE is set to N Value Range e Y Enable e N Disable Default Value N Phone User Interface Reference 2 1 3 VLAN Settings KX TGP550 only Page 35 Web User Interface Reference Enable VLAN KX TGP550 only Page 66 VLAN_ID_IP_PHONE KX TGP550 only Value Format Integer Description Specifies the VLAN ID for this unit Note e This setting is available only when NW_SETTING_ENABLE is set to N Value Range 1 4094 Default Value 2 Phone User Interface Reference 2 1 3 VLAN Settings KX TGP550 only Page 35 Web User Interface Reference IP Phone VLAN ID KX TGP550 only Page 66 VLAN_PRI_IP_PHONE KX TGP550 only Value Format Integer Description Specifies the priority number for the unit Note e This setting is available only when NW_SETTING ENABLE is set to N Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 155 4 4 4 HTTP Settings Value Range 0 7 Default
8. SIP_2NDPRSNC_ADDR_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example SIP_2NDPRSNC_ADDR_1 SIP_2NDPRSNC_ADDR_2 SIP_2NDPRSNC_ADDR_ 8 Value Format String Description Specifies the IP address of the secondary presence server Note e This setting is available only when SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_ 1 8 is specified in IP address notation Value Range IP address in dotted decimal notation Default Value Empty string SIP_2NDPRSNC_PORT_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example SIP_2NDPRSNC_PORT_1 SIP_2NDPRSNC_PORT_2 SIP_2NDPRSNC_PORT_8 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the port number to use for communication with the secondary SIP presence server Value Range 1 65535 Default Value 5060 USE_DEL_REG_OPEN 1 8 Parameter Name Example USE_DEL_REG OPEN 1 USE_DEL_ REG OPEN 2 USE_DEL_REG OPEN 8 Value Format Boolean Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 189 4 7 2 SIP Settings Description Specifies whether to enable cancelation before registration when for example the unit is turned on Value Range e y Enable cancelation before registration e N Disable cancelation before registration Default Value N USE_DEL_REG_CLOSE 1 8 Parameter Name Example USE_DEL_REG CLOSE_ 1 USE_DEL_REG CLOSE 2 Dep DEL REG CLOSE _8 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to enable the cancelation of
9. 3 6 2 10 SIP extensions Supports 100rel RFC 3262 Description Selects whether to add the option tag 100rel to the Supported header of the INVITE message For details refer to RFC 3262 Value Range e Yes es No Note e Ifyou select Yes the Reliability of Provisional Responses function will be enabled The option tag 100rel will be added to the Supported header of the INVITE message and to the Require header of the 1xx provisional message If you select No the option tag 100rel will not be used Default Value No Configuration File Reference SIP_100REL_ENABLE_ 1 8 Page 188 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 89 3 6 2 SIP Settings Line 1 Line 8 Supports Session Timer RFC 4028 Description Specifies the length of time in seconds that the unit waits before terminating SIP sessions when no reply to repeated requests is received For details refer to RFC 4028 Value Range 0 60 65535 0 Disable Default Value 0 Configuration File Reference SIP_SESSION_TIME_ 1 8 Page 181 3 6 2 11 Keep Alive Keep Alive Interval Description Specifies the interval in seconds between transmissions of the Keep Alive packet to the unit in order to maintain the NAT binding information Note e This setting is available only when Transport Protocol is set to UDP Value Range 0 10 300 0 Disable Default
10. Maximum Delay must be greater than Initial Delay Default Value 2 x 10 ms Configuration File Reference MIN_DELAY_ 1 8 Page 172 Initial Delay Description Specifies the initial delay in 10 millisecond units of the jitter buffer Value Range 1 7 x 10 ms Note e This setting is subject to the following conditions This value must be greater than or equal to Minimum Delay This value must be less than Maximum Delay Default Value 2 x 10 ms Configuration File Reference NOM_DELAY_ 1 8 Page 172 3 6 4 4 DTMF DTMF Type Description Selects the method for transmitting DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency tones 94 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 6 4 VoIP Settings Line 1 Line 8 Value Range e Outband e Inband Note e Ifyou select Outband DTMF tones will be sent through SDP Session Description Protocol compliant with RFC 2833 If you select Inband DTMF tones will be encoded in the RTP stream Default Value Outband Configuration File Reference OUTBANDDTMF_ 1 8 Page 174 Telephone event Payload Type Description Specifies the RFC 2833 payload type for DTMF tones Note e This setting is available only when DTMF Type is set to Outband Value Range 96 127 Default Value 101 Configuration File Reference TELEVENT_PTYPE_ 1 8 P
11. 5 0 1 Then check the IP addresses of the other devices on your local network If necessary change the unit s static IP address Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 7 1 Troubleshooting Making Answering Calls Intercom Problem Cause Solution The handset does not ring The ringer volume is turned off Adjust the ringer volume For details about the operations refer to the User Guide on the Panasonic Web site gt see Introduction Check the VoIP status in the Web user interface and confirm that each line is registered properly gt see To check the setting status in the Web user interface in this section Check that the SIP server address URLs of the configuration files encryption key and other required settings are correct Check the firewall and port forwarding settings on the router gt see 1 1 10 Other Network Settings Check Multi Number Settings in the Telephone tab in the Web user interface gt see 3 7 1 Multi Number Settings Check Call Control for each line in the Telephone tab in the Web user interface If Do Not Disturb is set to Yes the base unit or handset does not receive calls gt see 3 7 3 3 Call Features If Unconditional Enable Call Forward is set to Yes the base unit or handset does not receive calls gt see 3 7 3 4 Call Forward If Block Anonymous Call is set to Yes the base unit or
12. Default Value Not stored 3 4 5 2 Enable Global IP Address Usage per Line Line 1 Line 8 Description Selects whether to enable the NAT Traversal feature for each line Value Range e Yes e No Default Value No 3 4 5 3 External RTP Port Channel 1 3 Description Specifies the external RTP port number used for voice communication for each channel Value Range 0 1024 49150 0 Disable even number only Note e Each channel must be set to a unique port number and all port numbers must be an even number e You cannot specify here the same port number as any of the port numbers specified for the individual lines in Source Port in 3 6 2 5 SIP Source Port In addition you cannot specify a port number that is 1 less than a port number specified in Source Port if the source port number is an odd number s All 3 channels must be set to either enable or disable at the same time Default Value 72 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 5 1 Web Language 3 5 System This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the System tab 3 5 1 Web Language This screen allows you to select the language used for the Web user interface The language setting is only applicable when you log in to the Web user interface as User Note If you change the language while logged in to the Web user interface with the User
13. Description Specifies the password to use to authenticate the Administrator account when logging in to the Web user interface Value Range 6 16 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value adminpass Web User Interface Reference e New Password Page 74 Confirm New Password Page 74 USER_ID Value Format String Description Specifies the account ID used to access the Web user interface with the User account Value Range Max 16 characters except amp lt gt and space Note An empty string is not allowed Default Value user USER_PASS Value Format String Description Specifies the password to use to authenticate the User account when logging in to the Web user interface Value Range 6 16 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value Empty string only before a user accesses the Web user interface for the first time Web User Interface Reference e New Password Page 75 e Confirm New Password Page 75 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 135 4 3 2 System Time Settings 4 3 2 System Time Settings TIME_ZONE Value Format Integer Description Specifies the offset of local standard time from UTC GMT in minutes Value Range 720 780 Note Only the following values are available 720 GMT 12 00
14. SDP_CODEC4 1 SDP_PTYPEO 1 18 SDP_PTYPE1 1 255 SDP_PTYPE2_1 255 SDP_PTYPE3 1 255 SDP_PTYPE4 1 255 CODEC_G711_REQ 0 Note e If you use only G729A for lines 2 8 specify the same settings by changing the suffix _1 to 2 8 e This listing shows the parameters required for setting G729A only For details about the other settings see 8 2 Comprehensive Example of the Configuration File Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 8 3 Example with Incorrect Descriptions 8 3 Example with Incorrect Descriptions The following listing shows an example of a configuration file that contains incorrect formatting An improper description is entered in the first line A configuration file must start with the designated character sequence PCC Standard Format File Comment lines start in the middle of the lines Space characters are inserted in the middle of the setting line Comment lines begin with characters other than A specified value is not in the range allowed for that setting Incorrect Example This is a simplified sample configuration file AE HE HE FE FE HE E FE FE E E FE FE HE FE FE FE E FE FE FE E FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE AE FE FE FE E HE FE FE E FE FE FE E FE FE FE E FE FE FE HE HE FE FE HE HE HHHH Configuration Setting AE HE HE AE FE HE HE FE FE E HE FE FE E FE FE FE HE FE FE FE HE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE EHH AE HE FE FE FE HE FE FE E FE FE FE E FE FE F
15. Substitution lt before after gt Example lt 101 9999 gt If the dialed phone number is 101 101 is replaced by 9999 and then the call is made immediately Timer S s second Example 1x S2 If the dialed phone number begins with 1 the call is made after a lapse of 2 seconds s The number 0 9 followed by S or s shows the duration in seconds until the call is made Reject Example 123xxx If the dialed phone number is 123 followed by 3 digits the call is not made Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 207 5 3 1 Dial Plan Settings Element Available Value Description Alternation Example 1xxxx 2xxx If the dialed phone number is 1 followed by 4 digits or 2 followed by 3 digits the call is made immediately You can use this element to specify multiple numbers e You can enter up to 500 characters in Dial Plan e You can assign up to 20 dial plans separated by in Dial Plan e You can assign up to 32 digits per dial plan in Dial Plan e After the user completes dialing the unit immediately sends all the dialed digits if Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match is set to Yes in the Web user interface or if DIAL_PLAN NOT MATCH ENABLE 1 8 is set to Y in a configuration file The unit recognizes the end of dialing as follows The inter digit timer expires gt see Inter digit Timeout in 3 7 2 1 Call Control in t
16. Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference SIP_AUTHID_ 1 8 Page 178 Authentication Password Description Specifies the authentication password used to access the SIP server Value Range Max 64 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference SIP_PASS 1 8 Page 179 3 6 2 7 DNS Enable DNS SRV lookup Description Selects whether to request the DNS server to translate domain names into IP addresses using the SRV record 86 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 6 2 SIP Settings Line 1 Line 8 Value Range e Yes es No Note e Ifyou select Yes the unit will perform a DNS SRV lookup for a SIP registrar server SIP proxy server SIP outbound proxy server or SIP presence server If you select No the unit will not perform a DNS SRV lookup for a SIP registrar server SIP proxy server SIP outbound proxy server or SIP presence server Default Value No Configuration File Reference SIP_DNSSRV_ENA 1 8 Page 186 SRV lookup Prefix for UDP Description Specifies a prefix to add to the domain name when performing a DNS SRV lookup using UDP Note This setting is available only when Enable DNS SRV lookup is set to Yes Value Range Max 32 characters Default Value _sip _udp Configur
17. For details about the settings that can be configured with the configuration files and how to specify the settings see Section 4 Configuration File Programming Factory Phone system dealer Preset Pre provisioning Pre provisioning data Factory defaults Factory defaults Pre provisioning can aid the installation process by allowing phone system dealers to configure beforehand the minimum settings required to operate the unit For example phone system dealers can store on the TFTP server a configuration file that contains only the URL of a server where another configuration file is stored This second configuration file contains settings configured specifically for the usage environment of the user The user will be able to start using the unit by just connecting it to the network Pre provisioning is performed only once after the unit has been shipped Once any configuration such as pre provisioning provisioning or Web user interface programming has been applied pre provisioning will not be performed again Note that the settings configured by pre provisioning cannot be restored once it has been performed If you want to restore them consult your phone system dealer Although pre provisioning is often used to specify the location of the configuration files for provisioning you can configure any of the settings through pre provisioning The unit can be made fully operational by configuring settings through pre provisioning 1 1
18. SHARED CALL ENABLE_ 1 SHARED CALL ENABLE 2 SHARED CALL ENABLE 8 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to enable the Shared Call feature of the SIP server which is used to share one line among the units Note e You cannot set both SHARED CALL ENABLE 1 8 and SYNCHRONIZATION ENABLE 1 8 to Y at the same time e Availability depends on your phone system Value Range Y Enable shared call e N Disable shared call Note If set to Y the SIP server will control the line by using a shared call signaling method e If set to N the SIP server will control the line by using a standard signaling method Default Value N Web User Interface Reference Enable Shared Call Page 105 176 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 4 7 1 Call Control Settings SHARED_USER_ID_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example SHARED_USER_ID_1 SHARED_USER_ID_2 SHARED USER_ID 8 Value Format String Description Specifies the unique ID used by the SIP server when SHARED CALL ENABLE 1 8 is set to Y Value Range Max 24 characters Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Unique ID of Shared Call Page 106 SYNCHRONIZATION_ENABLE_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example SYNCHRONIZATION ENABLE 1 SYNCHRONI ZATION_ENABLE_2 SYNCHRONI ZATION_ENABLE_ 8 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to sync
19. Status BER I ich Ethernet Link Status LAN Port Connected VolP Status Ethernet Link Status PC Port Not Connected Connection Mode DHCP IP Address 192 168 0 18 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 0 1 DNS1 192 168 0 1 DNS2 3 3 2 1 Network Status MAC Address Description Indicates the MAC address of the unit reference only Value Range Not applicable Default Value Default MAC address example OO80FOABCDEF Ethernet Link Status LAN Port Description Indicates the current connection status of the Ethernet LAN port reference only Value Range e Connected e Not connected Default Value Not applicable Ethernet Link Status PC Port KX TGP550 only Description Indicates the current connection status of the Ethernet PC port reference only Value Range Connected e Not connected Default Value Not applicable 58 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 Connection Mode 3 3 2 Network Status Description Indicates whether the IP address of the unit is assigned automatically DHCP or manually static reference only Value Range DHCP e Static Default Value Not applicable IP Address Description Indicates the currently assigned IP address of the unit reference only Value Range IP address Default Value Current IP address Subnet Mask
20. Telephone Settings This setting can also be configured through other programming methods phone user interface programming or Web user interface Category Parameter Name Ref Call Control Settings CONFERENCE_SERVER_ ADDRESS Page 161 EMERGENCY CALL 1 5 Page 161 FIRSTDIGIT_TIM Page 162 INTDIGIT_TIM Page 162 VM_SUBSCRIBE_ENABLE Page 162 128 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 4 1 Configuration File Parameter List Category Parameter Name Ref Tone Settings DIAL TONE FRO Page 162 DIAL TONE TIMING Page 163 BUSY_TONE_FRQ Page 163 BUSY_TONE TIMING Page 163 RINGING TONE_FRQ Page 164 RINGING TONE_T IMING Page 164 STT_TONE_FRQ Page 164 STT_TONE_TIMING Page 164 REORDER_TONE_FRQ Page 165 REORDER ONE TIMING Page 165 HOWLER_TONE_FRQ Page 165 HOWLER_TONE_TIMING Page 165 HOWLER_START_TIME Page 166 BELL CORE_PATTERN1_TIMING Page 166 BELL CORE_PATTERN2_TIMING Page 166 BELL CORE _PATTERN3_ TIMING Page 166 BELL CORE _PATTERN4_TIMING Page 166 BELL CORE_PATTERN5 TIMING Page 167 1 This setting can also be configured through the Web user interface VoIP Settings Category Parameter Name Ref Codec Settings SDP_CODEC 0 4 _ 1 8 Page 167 SDP_CKRTE 0 4 _ 1 8 Page 168 SDP_PARAM 0 4 _ 1 8 Page 168 SDP_PTYPE 0 4 1 8 Page 168 CODEC_G711_REQ Page 169 CODEC_G729_PARAM Page 169
21. Value Format Integer Description Specifies the number of audio channels with SDP_PARAMx_y for the corresponding encoding name specified by SDP_CODECx_y x priority y line number Note e For the current version only the value 0 is supported Value Range 0 1 255 0 No parameter specification 1 255 Audio channels Default Value 0 SDP_PTYPE 0 4 1 8 Parameter Name Example SDP_PTYPEO_1 SDP_PTYPEO 2 SDP_PTYPEO 8 SDP_PTYPE1_1 SDP_PTYPE1_2 SDP_PTYPE1 8 SDP_PTYPE4 1 SDP_PTYPE4 2 SDP_PTYPE4 8 Value Format Integer 168 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 4 6 1 Codec Settings Description Specifies the payload type number with SDP_PTYPEx_y for the corresponding encoding name specified by SDP_CODECx_y x priority y line number Value Range 0 127 255 Note e If an empty string is set for SDP_CODECx_y 255 must be set as the value for the corresponding SDP_PTYPEx_y Default Value 9 for SDP_PTYPEO_1 to SDP_PTYPEO_8 8 for SDP_PTYPE1_1 to SDP_PTYPE1_8 2 for SDP_PTYPE2_1 to SDP_PTYPE2_8 18 for SDP_PTYPE3_1 to SDP_PTYPE3_8 0 for SDP_PTYPE4_1 to SDP_PTYPE4_8 CODEC_G711_REQ Value Format Integer Description Specifies whether to set PCMU as a codec selection automatically when SDP_CODECx_y x priority y line number is set to any codec se
22. 4 7 2 SIP Settings SIP_USER_AGENT Value Format String Description Specifies the text string to send as the user agent in the headers of SIP messages Value Range Max 40 characters Note An empty string is not allowed If mac is included in this parameter it will be replaced with the unit s MAC address in lower case s If MAC is included in this parameter it will be replaced with the units MAC address in upper case If MODELY is included in this parameter it will be replaced with the unit s model name e H fwver is included in this parameter it will be replaced with the firmware version of the unit Default Value Panasonic_ MODEL fwver mac Web User Interface Reference SIP User Agent Page 82 SIP_AUTHID_ 1 8 178 Parameter Name Example SIP_AUTHID_1 SIP_AUTHID_2 SIP_AUTHID_8 Value Format String Description Specifies the authentication ID required to access the SIP server Value Range Max 64 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Authentication ID Page 86 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 SIP_PASS 1 8 4 7 2 SIP Settings Parameter Name Example SIP_PASS 1 SIP_PASS_2 SIP_PASS_8 Value Format String Description Specifies the authentication password u
23. 88 Description Selects the number of times that non INVITE requests general SIP messages are retransmitted when no reply is received from the server Value Range 1 10 Default Value 10 Configuration File Reference OTHER_RTXN_ 1 8 Page 185 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 6 2 SIP Settings Line 1 Line 8 3 6 2 9 Quality of Service QoS SIP Packet QoS DSCP Description Selects the DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point level of DiffServ applied to SIP packets Value Range e Best Effort default 000 000 e AF11 Class1 Level Low 001 010 e AF12 Class1 Level Medium 001 100 e AF13 Class1 Level High 001 110 e AF21 Class2 Level Low 010 010 e AF22 Class2 Level Medium 010 100 e AF23 Class2 Level High 010 110 e AF31 Class3 Level Low 011 010 e AF32 Class3 Level Medium 011 100 e AF33 Class3 Level High 011 110 e AF41 Class4 Level Low 100 010 e AF42 Class4 Level Medium 100 100 e AF43 Class4 Level High 100 110 e CS1 Class1 001 000 e CS2 Class2 010 000 e CS3 Class3 011 000 e CS4 Class4 100 000 en nn E st ee E Inn nmn e CS5 Class5 101 000 e CS6 Class6 110 000 e CS7 Class7 111 000 EF Expedited Forwarding 101 110 nn NT Default Value Best Effort default 000 000 Configuration File Reference TOS_SIP_ 1 8 Page 181
24. Description Indicates the specified subnet mask for the unit reference only Value Range Subnet mask Default Value Current subnet mask Default Gateway Description Indicates the specified IP address of the default gateway for the network reference only Note e Ifthe default gateway address is not specified this field will be left blank Value Range IP address of the default gateway Default Value Not applicable DNS1 Description Indicates the specified IP address of the primary DNS server reference only Note e Ifthe primary DNS server address is not specified this field will be left blank Value Range IP address of the primary DNS server Default Value Not applicable Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 59 3 3 3 VoIP Status DNS2 Description Indicates the specified IP address of the secondary DNS server reference only Note e Ifthe secondary DNS server address is not specified this field will be left blank Value Range IP address of the secondary DNS server Default Value Not applicable 3 3 3 VoIP Status This screen allows you to view the current VoIP status of each line s unit Clicking Refresh updates the information displayed on the screen Panasonic KX TGP550T04 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance VoIP Status Web Port Close Refre
25. Description Selects the connection mode link speed and duplex mode ofthe LAN port Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 65 3 4 2 Ethernet Port Settings Value Range e Auto Negotiation e 100 Mbps Full Duplex e 100 Mbps Half Duplex e 10 Mbps Full Duplex e 10 Mbps Half Duplex Default Value Auto Negotiation Phone User Interface 2 1 2 Speed Duplex Settings Page 34 Reference PC Port KX TGP550 only Description Selects the connection mode link speed and duplex mode of the PC port Value Range e Auto Negotiation e 100 Mbps Full Duplex e 100 Mbps Half Duplex e 10 Mbps Full Duplex e 10 Mbps Half Duplex Default Value Auto Negotiation Phone User Interface 2 1 2 Speed Duplex Settings Page 34 Reference 3 4 2 2 VLAN Settings Enable VLAN KX TGP550 only Description Selects whether to use the VLAN feature to perform VoIP communication securely Value Range e Yes es No Default Value No Phone User Interface 2 1 3 VLAN Settings KX TGP550 only Page 35 Reference Configuration File Reference VLAN_ENABLE KX TGP550 only Page 155 IP Phone VLAN ID KX TGP550 only Description Specifies the VLAN ID for this unit Value Range 1 4094 Default Value 2 Phone User Interface 2 1 3 VLAN Settings KX TGP550 only Page 35 Reference 66 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 4 2 Ether
26. e Ifsetto yY the unit sends out all DNS queries at the same time The first DNS reply will be accepted and used by the unit e If set to N the unit sends DNS queries sequentially The unit sends a request to the DNS server with the highest priority for a preprogrammed time period 5 seconds When the timer expires the unit sends a request to the DNS server with the second priority Default Value H DNS_PRIORITY Value Format Boolean Description Specifies the priority of the DNS server Value Range DNS1_ADDR and DNS2_ADDR have first priority N DNS1_ADDR and DNS2_ADDR have no priority Note e If set to Y the DNS servers specified in DNS1_ADDR and DNS2_ADDR will be queried first If the queries fail the DNS server specified by the user DHCP or static will be queried e If setto N the DNS server specified by the user DHCP or static will be queried first If the query fails the DNS servers specified in DNS1_ADDR and DNS2_ ADDR will be queried Default Value N DNS1_ADDR Value Format String Description Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server for your phone system dealer Value Range IP address in dotted decimal notation Default Value Empty string DNS2_ADDR Value Format String Description Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server for your phone system dealer Value Range
27. 255 255 255 255 127 0 0 1 etc Default Value Not stored Phone User Interface Configuring Settings from the Base Unit KX TGP550 only Handset Reference Page 15 Configuration File Reference USER_DNS2_ADDR Page 153 3 4 2 Ethernet Port Settings This screen allows you to change the connection mode of the Ethernet ports and the VLAN settings Note When you change the settings on this screen and click Save after the message Complete has been displayed the base unit will restart automatically with the new settings applied If a unit is on a call when Complete has been displayed the base unit will restart after the unit returns to idle Incorrect settings may cause a network failure In such a case you cannot access the Web user interface anymore To access it again you need to correct the speed duplex settings gt see 2 1 2 Speed Duplex Settings or perform IP Reset see 2 1 4 IP Reset through phone user interface programming Panasonic KX TGP550T04 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance Ethernet Port Settings Network Link Speed Duplex Mode LAN Por Aut Negotiation Senet ee PC Port Auto Negotiation r HTTP Client Settings VLAN Settings Enable VLAN D Yes No VLAN ID 2 1 4094 IP Phone Priority T VLAN ID 1 1 4094 PC Priority Or The phone reboots automatically if you change the settings on this screen Save Cancel 3 4 2 1 Link Speed Duplex Mode LAN Port
28. 660 GMT 11 00 600 GMT 10 00 540 GMT 09 00 480 GMT 08 00 420 GMT 07 00 360 GMT 06 00 300 GMT 05 00 240 GMT 04 00 210 GMT 03 30 180 GMT 03 00 120 GMT 02 00 60 GMT 01 00 O GMT 60 GMT 01 00 120 GMT 02 00 180 GMT 03 00 210 GMT 03 30 240 GMT 04 00 270 GMT 04 30 300 GMT 05 00 330 GMT 05 30 345 GMT 05 45 360 GMT 06 00 390 GMT 06 30 420 GMT 07 00 480 GMT 08 00 540 GMT 09 00 570 GMT 09 30 600 GMT 10 00 660 GMT 11 00 720 GMT 12 00 780 GMT 13 00 e Ifyour location is west of Greenwich 0 GMT the value should be minus For example the value for New York City U S A is 300 Eastern Standard Time being 5 hours behind GMT ro wa Default Value 0 Web User Interface Reference Time Zone Page 78 DST_ENABLE Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to enable DST Summer Time Value Range e y Enable DST Summer Time e N Disable DST Summer Time Default Value N Web User Interface Reference Enable DST Enable Summer Time Page 78 DST_OFFSET Value Format Integer Description Specifies the amount of time in minutes to change the time when DST_ENABLE is set to Y 136 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 4 3 2 System Time Settings Value Range 0 720 Note e Th
29. DNS2 secondary DNS server gt OK Base unit G Handset A Configuring Settings from the Web User Interface To configure network settings automatically 1 2 3 4 Click the Network tab and then click Basic Network Settings Select DHCP for Connection Mode Enter a host name in Host Name Select Receive DNS server address automatically for Domain Name Server Select Use the following settings for Domain Name Server to enter the address for primary and secondary DNS servers manually 16 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 1 1 5 Pre provisioning To configure network settings manually Click the Network tab and then click Basic Network Settings Select Static for Connection Mode Enter an IP address in Static IP Address Enter the subnet mask in Subnet Mask Enter a default gateway address in Default Gateway Enter the address for the primary DNS server in DNS1 If necessary enter the address for the secondary DNS server in DNS2 Z 4 PE ZS een e EI If your phone system dealer does not allow you these settings you cannot change them even though the unit shows the setting menu Contact your phone system dealer for further information e Ifyou select On for DHCP on the unit or you select DHCP for Connection Mode in the Web user interface all the settings concerning static connection will be ignored even if they have been specified e If
30. DNS_PRIORITY N DNS1_ADDR DNS2_ADDR Ethernet Port Settings Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 8 2 Comprehensive Example of the Configuration File VLAN_ENABLE N VLAN_ID_IP_PHONE 2 VLAN_PRI_IP_PHONE 7 VLAN_ID_PC 1 VLAN_PRI_PC 0 HTTP Settings HTTP_VER 1 HTTP _USER_AGENT Panasonic_ MODEL fwver mac HTTP_SSL_VERIFY 0 CFG BOOT CERTIFICATE PATH Time Adjust Settings NTP_ADDR ntp example com TIME SYNC_INTVL 60 TIME QUERY _INTVL 43200 STUN Settings STUN_SERV_ADDR stun example com STUN_SERV_PORT 3478 STUN_2NDSERV_ADDR STUN_2NDSERV_PORT 3478 Miscellaneous Network Settings NW_SETTING ENABLE Y CUSTOM_WEB_PAGE 0 HE HE E FE FE FE HE HE E FE FE FE FE HE HE HE FE FE FE HE E HE FE FE FE FE E E FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE E HE FE FE FE FE E HE FE FE FE FE FE HE HE FE FE FE HH HH HE Telephone Settings HE HE E FE FE FE HE HE HE FE FE FE FE HE HE FE FE FE FE HE E HE FE FE FE FE E E FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE FE E HE FE FE FE FE E FE FE FE FE FE HE HE HE FE FE FE HH HH HE Call Control Settings CONFERENCE SERVER ADDRESS conference example com EMERGENCY _CALL1 911 EMERGENCY CALL2 EMERGENCY _CALL3 EMERGENCY _CALL4 EMERGENCY _CALL5 FIRSTDIGIT TIM 30 INTDIGIT TIM 5 VM_SUBSCRIBE ENABLE Y Tone Settings DIAL_TONE_FRQ 350 440 DIAL _TONE_TIMING 0 0 0 0 BUSY_TONE_FRQ 480 620 BUSY_TONE_TIMING 500 5
31. Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Service Domain Page 85 REG_EXPIRE_TIME_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example REG EXPIRE TIME 1 REG_EXPIRE_TIME_2 REG EXPIRE TIME 8 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the length of time in seconds that the registration remains valid This value is set in the Expires header of the REGISTER request Value Range 1 4294967295 Default Value 3600 REG_INTERVAL_RATE_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example REG INTERVAL RATE 1 REG_INTERVAL_RATE_2 REG INTERVAL RATE 8 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the percentage of the expires value after which to refresh registration by sending anew REGISTER message in the same dialog Value Range 1 100 Default Value 90 SIP_SESSION_TIME_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example SIP_SESSION TIME 1 SIP_SESSION_TIME 2 SIP_SESSION_TIME 8 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the length of time in seconds that the unit waits before terminating SIP sessions when no reply to repeated requests is received For details refer to RFC 4028 Value Range 0 60 65535 0 Disable Default Value 0 Web User Interface Reference Supports Session Timer RFC 4028 Page 90 TOS SIP 1 8 Parameter Name Example TOS SIP_1 TOS SIP 2 TOS SIP_8 Documen
32. Default Value 0 4 5 Telephone Settings 4 5 1 Call Control Settings CONFERENCE SERVER_ADDRESS Value Format String Description Specifies the URI for a conference server which consists of a user part the symbol and a host part for example conference example com Note e Availability depends on your phone system Value Range Max 127 characters Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Conference Server Address Page 102 EMERGENCY _CALL 1 5 Parameter Name Example EMERGENCY _CALL1 EMERGENCY_CALL2 EMERGENCY_CALL3 EMERGENCY _CALL4 EMERGENCY CALL5 Value Format String Description Specifies the phone numbers used for making emergency calls A user can dial any of the specified phone numbers at any time regardless of any restrictions imposed on the unit A maximum of 5 phone numbers can be specified Note e When a phone number is specified here it will be prioritized over the setting specified in DIAL PLAN 1 8 in4 7 1 Call Control Settings Value Range Max 24 characters Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference 1 5 Page 103 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 161 4 5 2 Tone Settings FIRSTDIGIT_TIM Value Format Integer Description Specifies the length of time in seconds within which the first digits of a dial number must be dialed When this timer expires t
33. Page 139 Time Description Specifies the end time of DST Summer Time in minutes after 12 00 AM Value Range 0 1439 Default Value 120 Configuration File Reference DST_STOP_TIME Page 139 3 6 VoIP This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the VoIP tab 3 6 1 SIP Settings This screen allows you to change the SIP settings that are common to all lines Panasonic KX TGP550T04 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance EE SIP Settings Web Port Close VoIP SIP Setting LT _siP settings l SIP User Agent Panasonic_ MODEL fwver mac Transport Protocol for SIP Line 2 Line 3 UDP TCP Transport Protocol The phone reboots automatically if you change this setting Save Cancel Line 5 Line 6 Line 7 Line 3 Line 5 5 D a H gt ei Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 81 3 6 1 SIP Settings 3 6 1 1 SIP Setting SIP User Agent Description Specifies the text string to send as the user agent in the headers of SIP messages Value Range Max 40 characters Note You cannot leave this field empty If mac is included in this field it will be replaced with the unit s MAC address in lower case s If MAC is included in this field it will be replaced with the unit s MAC address in upper case e H MODEL is included in this field it will be replaced with the unit
34. SIP_SESSION _ TIME _2 0 TOS_SIP_ 2 0 SIP 2NDPROXY ADDR_2 SIP 2NDPROXY PORT Zeen BO ED SIP_2NDRGSTR_ADDR_2 SIP_2NDRGSTR_PORT_2 5060 SIP_TIMER_T1_2 500 SIP_TIMER_T2_2 4 INVITE _RTXN_2 6 OTHER_RTXN_2 10 SIP_FOVR_NORSP_2 N SIP_FOVR_MAX 2 2 SIP_DNSSRV ENA_ 2 N SIP_UDP_SRV_ PREFIX 2 _sip udp SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_2 sip _tcp SIP_100REL_ENABLE_2 N SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_2 0 SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_2 presenceserver example com SIP_PRSNC_PORT_2 5060 SIP_2NDPRSNC_ADDR_2 SIP_2NDPRSNC_PORT_2 5060 USE_DEL_REG OPEN_2 N USE_DEL_REG CLOSE_2 N PORT_PUNCH_INTVL_2 0 SIP_SUBS_EXPIRE _2 3600 SUB_RTX_INTVL _2 10 REG_RTX_INTVL_2 10 SIP_P PREFERRED ID 2 N SIP_PRIVACY_2 N ADD_USER_PHONE_2 N SDP_USER_ID_2 SUB_INTERVAL_RATE_2 90 SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_2 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 231 8 2 1 Codec Settings for G729A only SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_2 5060 SIP_TRANSPORT_2 0 SIP_ANM DISPNAME_2 1 SIE ANN USERNAME 2 0 SIP_ANM HOSTNAME 2 N SIP_DETECT_SSAF_2 N PHONE NUMBER _2 1234567891 DISPLAY NAME 2 1234567891 aa i a a aia Settings for line 3 to 8 follows PaaS aS Seo Se Se Se EE 8 2 1 Codec Settings for G729A only 232 By specifying the configuration parameters as shown in the following example you can use only G729A for line 1 as the codec settings Example SDP_CODECO_1 G729A SDP_CODEC1_1 SDP_CODEC2_1 SDP_CODEC3_1
35. Value Format String Description Specifies a prefix to add to the domain name when performing a DNS SRV lookup using UDP Note e This setting is available only when SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_ 1 8 is set to Y Value Range Max 32 characters Default Value _sip _udp Web User Interface Reference SRV lookup Prefix for UDP Page 87 SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_1 SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_2 SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_ 8 Value Format String Description Specifies a prefix to add to the domain name when performing a DNS SRV lookup using TCP Note e This setting is available only when SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_ 1 8 is set to Y Value Range Max 32 characters Default Value _sip _tcp Web User Interface Reference SRV lookup Prefix for TCP Page 87 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 187 4 7 2 SIP Settings SIP_100REL_ENABLE_ 1 8 SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example SIP_100REL_ENABLE_1 SIP_100REL_ENABLE_2 SIP_100REL_ ENABLE 8 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to add the option tag 100rel to the Supported header of the INVITE message For details refer to RFC 3262 Value Range e Y Enable 100rel function e N Disable 100rel function Note e If setto Y the Reliability of Provisional Responses function will be enabled The
36. and presence server Value Range y Enable SSAF N Disable SSAF Note e If setto Y the unit receives SIP messages only from the source addresses stored in the SIP servers registrar server proxy server and presence server and not from other addresses However if SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_ 1 8 in 4 7 2 SIP Settings is specified the unit also receives SIP messages from the source address stored in the SIP outbound proxy server Default Value N Web User Interface Reference Enable SSAF SIP Source Address Filter Page 90 PHONE_NUMBER 1 8 Parameter Name Example PHONE _NUMBER_1 PHONE_NUMBER_2 PHONE_NUMBER_8 Value Format String Description Specifies the phone number to use as the user ID required for registration to the SIP registrar server Value Range Max 24 characters consisting of 0 9 and Note e No other characters are allowed Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Phone Number Page 83 DISPLAY_NAME_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example DISPLAY NAME 1 DISPLAY_NAME 2 DISPLAY_NAME 8 Value Format String Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 195 4 7 2 SIP Settings Description Specifies the name to display as the caller on the other party s phone when you make a call Value Range Max 16 characters or 32 bytes Note e You can use Unicode characters for this setting Defaul
37. e First and middle names are not exported using this procedure You can export all necessary items and edit the entry before importing them to the unit e Inthe file exported from Microsoft Outlook fields are separated by tabs and encoded using the default character encoding for your operating system 5 3 Dial Plan The dial plan settings control how numbers dialed by the user are transmitted over the network Dial plan settings can be configured on a per line basis These settings can be programmed either through the Web user interface gt see 3 7 3 2 Dial Plan or by configuration file programming gt see 4 7 1 Call Control Settings Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 205 5 3 1 Dial Plan Settings Dial Plan Flowchart When a user dials a single digit on a unit the following sequence of events begins A user dials a single digit on the unit A gt The unit stores the dialed digits The unit compares the dialed digits with each dial plan I Do the dialed digits fully or No partially match in the dial plan No Match Yes Has Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match been set to Yes Complete Match Partial Match Does the dial plan contain for number barring Does the dial plan contain for element repetition The call is denied Does the user press the key The cal
38. global IP addresses VoIP packets might be blocked by the router depending on the SIP server To avoid this problem this setting is required For details see 1 1 10 2 NAT Network Address Translation Setup Panasonic KX TGP550T04 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance Static NAPT Settings Network Global IP Address Global IP Address Null Disable Even if you enter a value for this setting if Global Address Detection is enabled the detected global IP address will be used Enable Global IP Address Usage per Line l Static NAPT Settings Line 1 D Yes No Line 2 D Yes No Line 3 D Yes No Line 4 Yes No Line 5 D Yes No Line 6 D Yes No Line 7 gt Yes No Line 8 D Yes No External RTP Port 0 1024 49150 Even Number Only 0 Disable Channel 1 3 0 1024 49150 Even Number Only 0 Disable 0 1024 49150 Even Number Only 0 Disable Set a value for all fields or set all fields to 0 disable Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 71 3 4 5 Static NAPT Settings 3 4 5 1 Global IP Address Global IP Address Description Specifies the global IP address of your network Note e You must enter a value in this field if at least 1 of Line 1 Line 8 is set to Yes or when port numbers are specified in Channel 1 3 e The global IP address will reflect SIP messages and RTP packets Value Range IP address in dotted decimal notation n n n n n 0 255
39. s model name s H fwver is included in this field it will be replaced with the firmware version of the unit Default Value Panasonic_ MODEL fwver mac Configuration File Reference SIP_USER_AGENT Page 178 3 6 1 2 Transport Protocol for SIP Transport Protocol Description Selects which transport layer protocol to use for sending SIP packets Note Ifyou change this setting the unit will restart automatically once the message Complete appears If the unit is on a call it will restart after it returns to idle Value Range es UDP e TCP Default Value UDP Configuration File Reference SIP_TRANSPORT_ 1 8 Page 193 82 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 6 2 SIP Settings Line 1 Line 8 3 6 2 SIP Settings Line 1 Line 8 This screen allows you to change the SIP settings that are specific to each line Panasonic KX TGP550T04 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance SIP Settings Line 1 VoIP Phone Number SIP Settings Phone Number SIP Server TC Registrar Server Address Registrar Server Port 5060 1 65535 Ee Proxy Server Port 5060 1 65535 3 VoIP Settings Presence Server Address Presence Server Port 5060 1 65535 Outbound Proxy Server Outbound Proxy Server Address Outbound Proxy Server Port 5060 1 65535 SIP Service Domain Service Domain SIP Source Port ii Source Port 5060 1024 49151 Auth
40. the PC Value Range No limitation Note e There are no limitations for the field entry However it is recommended that paths of less than 256 characters be used longer paths may cause longer data transfer times and result in an internal error Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 7 6 Export Phonebook Default Value Not stored 3 7 6 Export Phonebook This screen allows you to save the phonebook data stored in the unit as a TSV file on a PC For details see 5 2 1 Import Export Operation Note e When you begin transferring the phonebook data the Now Processing File Data screen is displayed and the screen is periodically reloaded Click the text HERE in the message to display the Export Phonebook screen again If you do not the Now Processing File Data screen remains displayed even if the export is complete Depending on your Web browser the screen might not reload automatically and you will need to click the text HERE before the timer expires in order for the export operation to function properly e Depending on the security settings of your Web browser pop up menus might be blocked at the time of export The security warning window may be displayed on another screen even if the Pop up Blocker settings are set to enable and the file may not be exported successfully In this case try the export operation again or disable the Pop up Blocker feature of your Web browser Pan
41. this case the validity of the certificate s date certificate s chain and the confirmation of the root certificate will be verified e Ifsetto 2 precise certificate verification is enabled In this case the validity of the server name will be verified in addition to the items verified when 1 is set Default Value CFG_ROOT_CERTIFICATE_PATH Value Format String Description Specifies the URI of the root certificate Note e Changing this setting may require restarting the unit Value Range Max 255 characters Note e The format must be RFC 1738 compliant as follows lt schema gt lt user gt lt password gt lt host gt lt port gt lt url path gt lt user gt must be less than 64 characters lt password gt must be less than 64 characters lt user gt lt password gt may be empty The total of lt schema gt and lt host gt lt port gt lt url path gt must be less than 128 characters lt port gt can be omitted if you do not need to specify the port number Default Value Empty string 4 4 5 Time Adjust Settings NTP_ADDR 158 Value Format String Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the NTP server Value Range Max 127 characters IP address in dotted decimal notation or FQDN Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference NTP Server Addres
42. vn E mn E E se ae nnmn e CS5 Class5 101 000 e CS6 Class6 110 000 e CS7 Class7 111 000 EF Expedited Forwarding 101 110 Default Value Best Effort default 000 000 Configuration File Reference TOS_RTP_ 1 8 Page 170 AA 3 6 4 2 Statistical Information RTCP Interval Description Specifies the interval in seconds between RTCP packets Value Range 0 5 65535 0 Disable Default Value 0 Configuration File Reference RTCP_INTVL_ 1 8 Page 171 3 6 4 3 Jitter Buffer Maximum Delay Description Specifies the maximum delay in 10 millisecond units of the jitter buffer Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 93 3 6 4 VoIP Settings Line 1 Line 8 Value Range 3 50 x 10 ms Note e This setting is subject to the following conditions This value must be greater than Initial Delay This value must be greater than Minimum Delay Initial Delay must be greater than or equal to Minimum Delay Default Value 20 x 10 ms Configuration File Reference MAX_DELAY_ 1 8 Page 171 Minimum Delay Description Specifies the minimum delay in 10 millisecond units of the jitter buffer Value Range 1 or 2 x 10 ms Note e This setting is subject to the following conditions This value must be less than or equal to Initial Delay This value must be less than Maximum Delay
43. 1 8 Parameter Name Example SIP_2NDRGSTR_ADDR_1 SIP_2NDRGSTR_ADDR 2 SIP_2NDRGSTR_ADDR_8 Value Format String Description Specifies the IP address of the secondary SIP registrar server Note e This setting is available only when SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_ 1 8 is specified in IP address notation Value Range IP address in dotted decimal notation Default Value Empty string SIP_2NDRGSTR_PORT_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example SIP_2NDRGSTR_PORT_1 SIP_2NDRGSTR_PORT_2 SIP_2NDRGSTR_PORT_8 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the port number to use for communication with the secondary SIP registrar server Value Range 1 65535 Default Value 5060 SIP_TIMER_T1_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example SIP_TIMER_T1_1 SIP_TIMER_T1_2 SIP_TIMER_T1_8 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the default interval in milliseconds between transmissions of SIP messages For details refer to RFC 3261 184 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 4 7 2 SIP Settings Value Range e 250 e 500 e 1000 e 2000 e 4000 Default Value 500 Web User Interface Reference T1 Timer Page 87 SIP_TIMER_T2_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example SIP_TIMER T2_1 SIP_TIMER_T2_2 SIP_TIMER_T2_ 8 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the maximum interval in seconds between tra
44. 1439 3 5 5 1 Synchronization Enable Synchronization by NTP Description Selects whether to enable the unit to automatically adjust its clock according to the time information provided by an NTP server Value Range e Yes e No Note Even if you select Yes this feature will not function properly if the NTP server address setting is invalid Default Value Yes Synchronization Interval Description Specifies the interval in seconds between synchronizations with the NTP server Value Range 10 86400 Default Value 43200 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 77 3 5 5 Time Adjust Settings Configuration File Reference TIME_QUERY_INTVL Page 159 3 5 5 2 Time Server NTP Server Address Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the NTP server Value Range Max 127 characters Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference NTP_ADDR Page 158 3 5 5 3 Time Zone Time Zone Description Selects your time zone Value Range GMT 12 00 GMT 13 00 Default Value GMT Configuration File Reference TIME_ZONE Page 136 3 5 5 4 Daylight Saving Time Summer Time Enable DST Enable Summer Time Description Selects whether to enable DST Summer Time Value Range e Yes No Default Value No Configuration File Reference DST_ENABLE Page 136 DST Offset Summer Time Offset
45. 7 2 2 Emergency Call Phone Numbers 1 5 Description Specifies the phone numbers used for making emergency calls A user can dial any of the specified phone numbers at any time regardless of any restrictions imposed on the unit A maximum of 5 phone numbers can be specified Note e When a phone number is specified here it will be prioritized over the setting specified in Dial Plan in 3 7 3 2 Dial Plan Value Range Max 24 characters Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference EMERGENCY_CALL 1 5 Page 161 3 7 2 3 Call Rejection Phone Numbers 1 30 Description Specifies the phone numbers to reject incoming calls from A maximum of 30 phone numbers can be specified Note e You can also configure this setting through the phone user interface If these settings are changed through the phone user interface while being changed through the Web user interface the settings made through the phone user interface will be overwritten by the settings made through the Web user interface Value Range Max 24 characters Note e Even if you specify nonconsecutive fields e g fields 1 5 and 30 they will be rearranged into consecutive fields after you save the settings e 1 2 and 3 Default Value Not stored Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 103 3 7 3 Call Control Line 1 Line 8 3 7 3 Call Control Line 1 Line 8
46. Administrator Guide 133 4 3 1 Login Account Settings No space characters are allowed Description Describes the details of the parameter Value Range Indicates the permitted value range of the parameter Default Value Indicates the factory default value of the parameter Actual default values may vary depending on your phone system dealer Phone User Interface Reference Provides the reference page of the corresponding parameter in phone user interface programming Web User Interface Reference Provides the reference page of the corresponding parameter in Web user interface programming 4 2 3 Characters Available for String Values Unless noted otherwise in Value Range only ASCII characters can be used for parameter values Unicode characters can also be used in some parameter values Available ASCII characters are shown on a white background in the following table 4 3 System Settings 4 3 1 Login Account Settings ADMIN_ID Value Format String Description Specifies the account ID used to access the Web user interface with the Administrator account 134 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 4 3 1 Login Account Settings Value Range Max 16 characters except amp lt gt and space Note An empty string is not allowed Default Value admin ADMIN_PASS Value Format String
47. DENTPan 2 2 eee ee ege ee diesen 77 Synchronization Interval EE 77 Ru 78 NTP Server e 78 TIMEZONE EE 78 TME ZOMG eree e E nice 78 Daylight Saving Time Summer Time 2 2 cccccccccesesseeecneeenenneceesecceneneeeseennendeneanenee 78 Enable DST Enable Summer Tine es 78 DST Offset Summer Time Offset Henne 78 Start Day and Time of DST Start Day and Time of Summer Time 4444 79 MON WEE 79 Day or EE 79 MME EE 80 End Day and Time of DST End Day and Time of Summer Time 80 IMO EE 80 Day I Week een een 80 len EE 81 MOD Eege 81 SIP eg Ehe Eege 81 SIP SONG EE 82 SN SSC AJEN EE 82 Transport Protocol for SIP ccccccccccccececnecceeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesaeeeaaeeaaas 82 Transport Protocol sssnnsnnnenennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnen nee nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnn 82 SIP Settings Line 1 Line 8 nennen 83 Phone Number 83 Phone Number ins sins eid 83 E ENEE ay cnt EE EE EE EE 83 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 5 Table of Contents e e 83 Registrar server ON EE 84 Proxy Server e 84 Proxy Sener E 84 Presence Server Address cccccccecccceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeesaeeaaaeaaaaaaseeaaseeeeeeteneeeseees 84 Presence Server Port 84 3 6 2 3 Outbound NEE 85 Outbound Proxy Server Address 2 na eege 85 Outbound Proxy Server Poller Besten eege ee e 85 3 6 2 4 SIP Service DOMAIN sisirin i ninisi nino nN EE EEEE E AEE
48. DIAL PLAN 2 DIAL PLAN 8 Value Format String Description Specifies a dial format such as specific phone numbers that control which numbers can be dialed or how to handle the call when making a call For details see 5 3 Dial Plan Value Range Max 500 characters Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Dial Plan Page 106 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 175 4 7 1 Call Control Settings DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE 1 8 Parameter Name Example DIAL_PLAN NOT MATCH ENABLE 1 DIAL_PLAN NOT MATCH ENABLE 2 DIAL PLAN MOT MATCH ENABLE 8 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to enable dial plan filtering so that a call is not made when the dialed number does not match any of the dial formats specified in DIAL PLAN 1 8 Value Range e Y Enable dial plan filtering e N Disable dial plan filtering Note e If setto Y the dialed number will not be sent to the line when the number dialed by the user does not match any of the dial formats specified in the dial plan e If set to N the dialed number will be sent to the line even if the number dialed by the user does not match any of the dial formats specified in the dial plan Default Value N Web User Interface Reference Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match Page 107 SHARED_CALL_ENABLE 1 8 Parameter Name Example
49. DISPNAME_8 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the text string to set as the display name in the From header when making anonymous calls Value Range e 0 Use normal display name e 1 Use Anonymous for display name e 2 Do not send a display name Default Value 1 SIP_ANM_USERNAME 1 8 Parameter Name Example SIP_ANM USERNAME 1 SIP_ANM USERNAME 2 SIE ANN USERNAME 8 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the text string to set as the user name in the From header when making anonymous calls Value Range e 0 Use normal user name e 1 Use anonymous for user name 2 Do not send a user name Default Value 0 SIP_ANM_HOSTNAME 1 8 Parameter Name Example SIP_ANM HOSTNAME 1 SIP_ANM HOSTNAME 2 SIE ANN HOSTNAME 8 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to set an anonymous host name in the From header when making anonymous calls 194 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 4 7 2 SIP Settings Value Range e y Use anonymous invalid for host name N Use normal host name Default Value N SIP_DETECT_SSAF 1 8 Parameter Name Example SIP_DETECT_SSAF_1 SIP_DETECT_SSAF_2 SIP_DETECT SSAF_8 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to enable SSAF for the SIP servers registrar server proxy server
50. Et Et Et RI 45 1M RSR RR wm I 46 a aaa El Base zB m mM RB ala a a I Sae 3 7 1 1 Grouping Handset Handset selection for receiving calls Line No Description Indicates the line number 1 8 to which a phone number is assigned reference only Value Range Line 1 Line 8 Default Value Not applicable Phone Number Description Indicates the currently assigned phone numbers reference only Note e The corresponding field is blank if a line has not yet been leased or if the unit has not been configured Value Range Max 24 digits Default Value Not applicable Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 99 3 7 1 Multi Number Settings Handset No Description Selects the handsets 1 6 that calls will arrive at for each line Value Range Selected Not selected Note e You cannot clear all the check boxes including Base KX TGP550 only Default Value Selected all Base KX TGP550 only Description Selects whether calls arrive at the base unit for each line Value Range Selected Not selected Note e You cannot clear all the check boxes including Handset Nol Default Value Selected all 3 7 1 2 Handset and Line No selection for making calls Handset No Description Indicates the handsets 1 6 that can be used to make a call reference on
51. Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match is set to No the call is denied Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 209 5 3 1 Dial Plan Settings 210 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 Section 6 Firmware Update This section explains how to update the firmware of the unit Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 211 6 2 Firmware Update Settings 6 1 Firmware Server Setup 6 No special server is necessary for the firmware update You can use an HTTP HTTPS FTP or TFTP server as the firmware server by simply setting its URL 2 Firmware Update Settings Firmware updates are provided by the manufacturer when necessary The firmware update will be executed by setting the corresponding parameters using configuration file programming gt see 4 3 4 Firmware Update Settings or Web user interface programming gt see 3 8 1 Firmware Maintenance The following shows the parameters and the setting procedures Firmware Update Enable Disable e Ina configuration file add the line FIRM_UPGRADE_ENABLE Y e In the Web user interface click the Maintenance tab click Firmware Maintenance and then select Yes for Enable Firmware Update Firmware Version Number for Europe Model e Ina configuration file specify the new version number of the Europe model in FIRM_VER_EUDECT Firmware Version Number for North America Model Ina configuration file specify the new version number of
52. Excel Internet Explorer Outlook Windows and Windows Vista are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries e Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds in the United States other countries or both All other trademarks identified herein are the property of their respective owners e Microsoft product screen shot s reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation NOTES e The screen shots shown in this guide are provided for reference only and may differ from the screens displayed on your PC 2 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 Table of Contents Table of Contents PANG AN Setup see ie 13 1 1 SEAU EE 14 1 1 1 SEKR EE 14 1 1 2 Language Selection for the EE 14 1 1 3 Basic Network Setup ccccccccccnseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeaaesaaanaaaa 14 1 1 4 Overview of Programming return 17 1 1 5 Pre PrOVISIONIMNO WEE 17 1 1 5 1 What is Pre provisioning 22 2 17 1 1 5 2 Pre provisioning when Setting Static IP Addresses AAA 18 1 1 5 3 Server for Pre provisioning E 19 1 1 5 4 Pre provisioning Setting Example 2 02cscscccesenencceeeteeseeeenennedensnetenenastaceeeeescess 19 1 1 6 PIOVISIORING seen essen 21 1 1 6 1 What IS VOM TS e NEE 21 1 1 6 2 Protocols for PIovsonng sen una 21 1 1 6 3 lis eet gill sisisi NEU age Pre DIEBE TIER READER TEPIELEPLELURLEERIELFERNEORESEBEDE ILERS
53. Integer Description Specifies the start time of DST Summer Time in minutes after 12 00 AM Value Range 0 1439 Default Value 120 Web User Interface Reference Time Page 80 DST_STOP_MONTH Value Format Integer Description Specifies the month in which DST Summer Time ends Value Range 1 12 Default Value 10 Web User Interface Reference Month Page 80 DST_STOP_ORDINAL_DAY 138 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the number of the week on which DST Summer Time ends The actual end day is specified in DST_STOP_DAY_OF_WEEK For example to specify the second Sunday specify 2 in this parameter and 0 in the next parameter Value Range 1 5 1 the first week of the month 2 the second week of the month 3 the third week of the month 4 the fourth week of the month 5 the fifth week of the month Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 4 3 3 Syslog Settings Default Value 2 Web User Interface Reference Day of Week Page 80 DST_STOP_DAY_OF_WEEK Value Format Integer Description Specifies the day of the week on which DST Summer Time ends Value Range 0 6 Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday l oooh A Default Value Web User Interface Reference Day of
54. Integer Description Specifies the interval in seconds between RTCP packets Value Range 0 5 65535 0 Disable Default Value 0 Web User Interface Reference RTCP Interval Page 93 MAX_DELAY_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example MAX DELAY_1 MAX DELAY 2 MAX DELAY 8 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 171 4 6 2 RTP Settings Value Format Integer Description Specifies the maximum delay in 10 millisecond units of the jitter buffer Value Range 3 50 x 10 ms Note e This setting is subject to the following conditions This value must be greater than NOM_DELAY This value must be greater than MIN_DELAY NOM DELAY must be greater than or equal to MIN DELAY Default Value 20 Web User Interface Reference Maximum Delay Page 93 MIN_DELAY_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example MIN _DELAY 1 MIN DELAY_2 MIN _DELAY_8 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the minimum delay in 10 millisecond units of the jitter buffer Value Range 1 or 2 x 10 ms Note e This setting is subject to the following conditions This value must be less than or equal to NOM_DELAY This value must be less than MAX_DELAY MAX DELAY must be greater than NOM_DELAY Default Value 2 Web User Interface Reference Minimum Delay Page 94 NOM_DELAY 1 8 172 Parameter Name Exampl
55. Privacy header es N Do not add the Privacy header Default Value N ADD_USER_PHONE_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example ADD_USER_PHONE_1 ADD_USER_PHONE_2 ADD_USER_PHONE_8 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to add user phone to the SIP URI in SIP messages Value Range e Y Add user phone e N Do not add user phone Note e SIP URI example sip 1111 tokyo example com user phone when set to Y sip 1111 tokyo example com when set to N Default Value SDP_USER_ID_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example SDP_USER_ID_1 SDP_USER_ID_2 SDP_USER_ID_8 Value Format String Description Specifies the user ID used in the o line field of SDP Value Range Max 32 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value SUB_INTERVAL_RATE_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example SUB_INTERVAL_RATE_1 SUB_INTERVAL_RATE_2 SUB_INTERVAL_RATE 8 Value Format Integer 192 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 4 7 2 SIP Settings Description Specifies the percentage of the expires value after which to refresh subscriptions by sending a new SUBSCRIBE message in the same dialog Value Range 1 100 Default Value 90 SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_1 SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_2 SIP_OU
56. Settings HTTP Version HTTP 1 0 OHTTPI1 1 Ethernet Port Settings HTTP User Agent Panasonic_ MODEL fwver mac HTP Ciient settings Global Address Detection Proxy Server Settings Enable Proxy Yeso No Proxy Server Address Proxy Server Port 8080 1 65535 Save Cancel J 3 4 3 1 HTTP Client Settings HTTP Version Description Selects which version ofthe HTTP protocol to use for HTTP communication Value Range e HTTP 1 0 e HTTP 1 1 Note e For this unit it is strongly recommended that you select HTTP 1 0 However if the HTTP server does not function well with HTTP 1 0 try changing the setting HTTP 1 1 Default Value HTTP 1 0 Configuration File Reference HTTP_VER Page 156 HTTP User Agent Description Specifies the text string to send as the user agent in the header of HTTP requests 68 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 4 3 HTTP Client Settings Value Range Max 40 characters Note You cannot leave this field empty If mac is included in this field it will be replaced with the unit s MAC address in lower case s If MAC is included in this field it will be replaced with the unit s MAC address in upper case e H MODEL is included in this field it will be replaced with the unit s model name s H fwver is included in this field it will be replaced with the firmware version of the unit Default Value Panas
57. TGP550T04 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance Local Firmware Update Web Port Close Maintenance Firmware Maintenance Encryption Yes No Lovelace File Name Browse Provisioning Maintenance Restan O O Update Firmware 3 8 2 1 Local Firmware Update Encryption Description Selects whether the firmware files are encrypted or not Value Range e Yes e No Default Value Yes Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 119 3 8 3 Provisioning Maintenance File Name Description Specifies the path of the firmware file to be imported Value Range No limitation Note There are no limitations for the field entry However it is recommended that paths of less than 256 characters be used longer paths may cause longer data transfer times and result in an internal error Default Value Not stored 3 8 3 Provisioning Maintenance This screen allows you to change the provisioning setup to download the configuration files from the provisioning server of your phone system Note e Each unit can accept up to 3 configuration files For details about provisioning see 1 1 6 Provisioning Panasonic KX TGP550T04 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance Provisioning Maintenance Web Port Close Maintenance Local Firmware Update Provisioning Maintenance Reset to Defaults Enable Provisioning Standard File URL Product File URL Maste
58. TIMING Value Format Comma separated Integer Description Specifies the cadence in milliseconds of pattern ID 3 described in the LSSGR GR 506 CORE Signaling for Analog Interfaces section 14 using 6 whole numbers separated by commas Value Range 0 5000 0 Infinite time Default Value 400 200 400 200 800 4000 BELL_CORE_PATTERN4_TIMING Value Format Comma separated Integer 166 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 4 6 1 Codec Settings Description Specifies the cadence in milliseconds of pattern ID 4 described in the LSSGR GR 506 CORE Signaling for Analog Interfaces section 14 using 6 whole numbers separated by commas Value Range 0 5000 0 Infinite time Default Value 300 200 1000 200 300 4000 BELL_CORE_PATTERN5_TIMING Value Format Integer Description Specifies the cadence in milliseconds of pattern ID 5 described in the LSSGR GR 506 CORE Signaling for Analog Interfaces section 14 Value Range 0 5000 0 Infinite time Default Value 500 4 6 VoIP Settings 4 6 1 Codec Settings SDP_CODEC 0 4 1 8 Parameter Name Example SDP_CODECO_1 SDP_CODECO 2 SDP_CODECO_ 8 SDP_CODEC1_1 SDP_CODEC1_2 SDP_CODEC1 8 SDP_CODEC4 1 SDP_CODEC4 2 SDP_CODEC4 8 Value Format String Description Specifies the 1st to 5th priority from 0 4 codec to be used for each l
59. The operation failed because All screens e The base unit or handset is in an operation that accesses the flash memory of the base unit e When attempting to import export the phonebook data the base unit KX TGP550 only or handset is on a call e While transferring the phonebook data a Call arrived at the base unit KX TGP550 only or handset e When attempting to import export the phonebook data a menu operation that communicates with the base unit is being performed on the target handset 3 7 5 Import Phonebook 3 7 6 Export Phonebook e When updating the firmware the base unit or handset is on a call 3 8 2 Local Firmware Update Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 2 2 Accessing the Web User Interface Result Message Description Applicable Screens Failed Canceled The operation failed because e While transferring the phonebook data The following key was pressed on the handset In cases when buttons soft key icons are shown in English alphabet OFF In cases when buttons soft key icons are shown in symbols pictures IP Reset was performed on the base unit KX TGP550 only or handset 3 7 5 Import Phonebook e While transferring the firmware file IP Reset was performed on the base unit KX TGP550 only or handset 3 8 2 Local Firmware Update e While transferring the phonebook data The following key was press
60. This screen allows you to configure various call features that are specific to each line Panasonic KX TGP550T04 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance Call Control Line 1 Telephone Cali Controi Multi Number Settings Display Name Call Control Enable Privacy Mode Yes O No Voice Mail Access Number Enable Shared Call Yes No Unique ID of Shared Call Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward Dial Plan Tone Settings a Yes No Import Phonebook Export Phonebook Dial Plan max 500 columns m Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match Block Caller ID Yes No Block Anonymous Call Yes No Do Not Disturb Yes No Enable Call Forward D Yes No Unconditional Phone Number Yes No Enable Call Forward D Yes No Busy Phone Number Enable Call Forward D Yes No No Answer Phone Number 3 7 3 1 Call Control Display Name Description Specifies the name to display as the caller on the other party s phone when you make a call Value Range Max 16 characters or 32 bytes Note e You can use Unicode characters for this setting Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference DISPLAY_NAME_ 1 8 Page 195 Enable Privacy Mode Description Selects whether to enable privacy mode which prohibits another handset or base unit from barging in on a conversation 104 Administrator Guide Document Version 20
61. Use Problem Cause Solution cannot hear a dial tone e Confirm that the Ethernet cable is properly connected For details refer to the Quick Guide on the Panasonic Web site gt see Introduction e Network settings may not be correct Many installation issues can be resolved by resetting all the equipment First shut down your modem router hub base unit and PC Then turn the devices back on one at a time in this order modem router hub base unit PC e Ifyou cannot access Internet Web pages using your PC check to see if your phone system is having connection issues in your area e Check the VoIP status in the Web user interface and confirm that each line is registered properly gt see To check the setting status in the Web user interface in this section e Check that the SIP server address URLs of the configuration files encryption key and other required settings are correct Check the firewall and port forwarding settings on the router gt see 1 1 10 Other Network Settings For details about the settings consult your network administrator or phone system dealer 216 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 7 1 Troubleshooting STATUS Indicator in cases when buttons soft key icons are shown in English alphabet or C Indicator in cases when buttons soft key icons are shown in symbols pictures Problem Cause Solution The STATUS indicator or ET indicator cont
62. Value 0 Configuration File Reference PORT_PUNCH_INTVL_ 1 8 Page 190 3 6 2 12 Security Enable SSAF SIP Source Address Filter Description Selects whether to enable SSAF SIP Source Address Filter for the SIP servers registrar server proxy server and presence server Value Range e Yes es No Note e Ifyou select Yes the unit receives SIP messages only from the source addresses stored in the SIP servers registrar server proxy server and presence server and not from other addresses However if Outbound Proxy Server Address in 3 6 2 3 Outbound Proxy Server is specified the unit also receives SIP messages from the source address stored in the SIP outbound proxy server Default Value No Configuration File Reference SIP_DETECT_SSAF_ 1 8 Page 195 90 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 6 3 VoIP Settings 3 6 3 VoIP Settings This screen allows you to change the VoIP settings that are common to all lines Panasonic KX TGP550T04 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance VoIP Settings VoIP RTP Settings EZ RTP Packet Time 20 milliseconds Minimum RTP Port Number 16000 1024 48750 Even Number Only Maximum RTP Port Number 20000 1424 49150 Even Number Only Save Cancel Es Line 8 vor settings Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 Line7 Line 8 3 6 3 1 RTP Settings RTP Packet Time
63. Value Format Comma separated Integer Description Specifies the pattern in milliseconds of dial tones using 4 whole numbers on 1 off 1 on 2 off 2 separated by commas Value Range 0 5000 0 Infinite time Note s The unit will play the tone for the duration of the first value stop it for the duration of the second value play it for the duration of the third value and then stop it for the duration of the last value The whole sequence will then repeat For example if the value for this setting is 100 100 0 0 the unit will play the tone for 100 ms stop it for 100 ms and then play it continuously Default Value 0 0 0 0 The unit plays the dial tone continuously Web User Interface Reference Tone Timings Page 112 BUSY_TONE_FRQ Value Format Comma separated Integer Description Specifies the dual tone frequencies in hertz of busy tones using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma Value Range 0 200 1000 0 No tone Default Value 480 620 Web User Interface Reference Tone Frequencies Page 113 BUSY_TONE_TIMING Value Format Comma separated Integer Description Specifies the pattern in milliseconds of busy tones using 4 whole numbers on 1 off 1 on 2 off 2 separated by commas Value Range 0 5000 0 Infinite time Default Value 500 500 500 500 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrat
64. as necessary and then import the exported data into the unit For details about the operation see 5 2 3 Exporting Data from Microsoft Outlook Phonebook data Microsoft Microsoft Excel Outlook 8 Backing up Phonebook Data You can export the phonebook data from the unit to a PC and keep the file as a backup in case of data loss or for use when exchanging the base unit or handset Importing the Same Phonebook Data to the Base Unit Handset or Another Unit You can export the phonebook data created on a unit toa PC and then import it into other base units handsets or another unit Phonebook data 200 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 5 2 Phonebook Import and Export You can also import phonebook data created on a PC to other base units handsets or another unit Phonebook Microsoft data Excel Import Export File Format The file format used for importing and exporting the phonebook data is TSV When importing or exporting using Microsoft Excel CSV Comma separated Value is generally used as the file format A phonebook entry in the unit has only 2 fields one for the name and one for the phone number An entry in the phonebook data is represented in text as name lt TAB gt phone number lt line break gt Any data after the phone number is ignored The text data can be edited using any text editing software that supports UTF 16 encoding with a BOM and little endian byte orderin
65. costs Seabee deve edel 59 Detault Gateway E 59 DNO ee EE 59 DOING reece ENEE EE EE EE Ee Eege 60 3 3 3 te UE TEE 60 3 3 3 1 del TEE EE 60 LANG Te DEE 60 Phone Number uuuu200sunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nenn 60 VOF a a nee is 61 3 4 NEtWOrk un a EEE ae en en 61 3 4 1 Basic Network SettingS ass 61 3 4 1 1 Connection Mode nun nennen 62 Gonneetlon Mode u 22 4 22L 1 ana en en nee nen 62 3 4 1 2 DACP Settings TE 62 aleng El 62 Domain Name Server uuennesessunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nenn 63 3 4 1 3 Statie SENGS nen else ee 63 Static IP Address iaeeeeneinnernerrnerinrrnerinnrieriunrinnkknr ker kkn ntn nr annann ananena anunn nanen nnn 63 DUDNELIMASK E BEE EE 64 Detault E 64 DNO bape ee e r E a 64 BJ E AAT ATAT AT E T TTA S TETN E 65 3 4 2 Ethernet Pot so ING crags as eta Ea ner 65 3 4 2 1 Link Speed Duplex Mode cccccceeeeeeeeeeceeceeaaeenaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaaeaansecseeeeeseeeeees 65 LAN Oe eege eebe ahnen 65 PC Port KX TGP550 only 66 3 4 2 2 VEAN SSNS ee 66 Enable VLAN KX TGP550 on 66 IP Phone VLAN ID KX TGP550 on 66 IP Phone Priority KX TGP550 only E 67 PC VLAN ID KX TGP550 on 67 PC Priority KX TGP550 only E 67 3 4 3 APIP Client Settings aerarmea ea 68 3 4 3 1 ATIP ele EE 68 ATIF Cen EE 68 ATIP USer GIN EE 68 3 4 3 2 Proxy Server S
66. domain name provided by your phone system dealer The domain name is the part of the SIP URI that comes after the symbol Value Range Max 127 characters Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference SIP_SVCDOMAIN_ 1 8 Page 180 3 6 2 5 SIP Source Port Source Port Description Specifies the source port number used by the unit for SIP communication Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 85 3 6 2 SIP Settings Line 1 Line 8 Value Range 1024 49151 Note e You cannot specify here the same port number as any of the port numbers in Channel 1 3 in 3 4 5 3 External RTP Port if they are configured In addition you cannot specify a port number that is 1 greater than a port number specified in Channel 1 3 s The SIP port number for each line must be unique e You cannot specify the same port number as the port number specified in Web Server Port in 3 5 4 1 Web Server Settings Default Value 5060 for Line 1 5070 for Line 2 5080 for Line 3 5090 for Line 4 5100 for Line 5 5110 for Line 6 5120 for Line 7 5130 for Line 8 Configuration File Reference SIP_SRC_PORT_ 1 8 Page 179 3 6 2 6 SIP Authentication Authentication ID Description Specifies the authentication ID required to access the SIP server Value Range Max 64 characters except amp lt gt and space
67. following settings DNS1 DNS2 Static IP Address Domain Name Server Subnet Mask Default Gateway DNS1 DNS2 Save Cancel 3 4 1 1 Connection Mode Connection Mode Description Selects whether to assign the IP address automatically DHCP or manually static Value Range s DHCP Static Default Value DHCP Phone User Interface Configuring Settings from the Base Unit KX TGP550 only Handset Reference Page 15 Configuration File Reference CONNECTION_TYPE Page 150 3 4 1 2 DHCP Settings Host Name Description Specifies the host name for the unit to send to the DHCP server Note e This setting is available only when Connection Mode is set to DHCP Value Range Max 63 characters Note You cannot leave this field empty 62 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 4 1 Basic Network Settings Default Value Model number example TGP5nn Configuration File Reference HOST_NAME Page 151 Domain Name Server Description Selects whether to receive DNS server addresses automatically or to assign a DNS server addresses up to 2 manually Note e This setting is available only when Connection Mode is set to DHCP Value Range Receive DNS server address automatically e Use the following settings DNS1 DNS2 Note e Ifyou select Use the following settings specify the IP address es of the primary and if n
68. from a PC to the specified unit For details see 5 2 1 Import Export Operation Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 115 Note 3 7 5 Import Phonebook e Ifthe existing phonebook data has an entry with the same name and phone number as an imported entry the imported entry is not added as a new entry The import is still successful and the message Complete will be displayed e When you begin transferring the phonebook data the Now Processing File Data screen is displayed and the screen is periodically reloaded Depending on your Web browser the screen might not reload automatically and you will need to click the text HERE before the timer expires in order for the import operation to function properly Panasonic KX TGP550T04 Web Port Close Telephone P inuti numer Settings Line 8 Tone Settings Import Phonebook Export Phonebook Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance Import Phonebook Import Phonebook Handset or Base Unit File Name Handset 1 Browse 3 7 5 1 Import Phonebook Handset or Base Unit Description Selects the handset or base unit to import the phonebook entries to Value Range e Handset 1 e Handset 2 e Handset 3 e Handset 4 e Handset 5 e Handset 6 e Base Unit KX TGP550 only Default Value Handset 1 File Name Description Specifies the path of the TSV Tab separated Value file to import from
69. handset does not receive anonymous calls gt see 3 7 3 3 Call Features Check that Do Not Disturb Enable Call Forward and Block Anonymous Call are not controlled by your phone system If 3 calls are being handled by the base unit and or handsets simultaneously a new call cannot be received and the unit will not ring For details about settings consult your network administrator or phone system dealer Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 219 7 1 Troubleshooting 220 Problem Cause Solution The base unit KX TGP550 only does not ring The ringer volume is turned off Adjust the ringer volume For details about the operations refer to the User Guide on the Panasonic Web site gt see Introduction Check the VoIP status in the Web user interface and confirm that each line is registered properly gt see To check the setting status in the Web user interface in this section Check that the SIP server address URLs of the configuration files encryption key and other required settings are correct Check the firewall and port forwarding settings on the router gt see 1 1 10 Other Network Settings Check Multi Number Settings in the Telephone tab in the Web user interface gt see 3 7 1 Multi Number Settings Check Call Control for each line in the Telephone tab in the Web user interface If Do Not Disturb is set to Yes the base unit or ha
70. menu operation was being performed on the handset preventing communication with the base unit 3 7 5 Import Phonebook 3 7 6 Export Phonebook Memory Full The operation failed because e When attempting to import the phonebook data the total number of phonebook entries including the existing entries exceeds the limit of up to 100 entries 3 7 5 Import Phonebook No Data The operation failed because e The imported phonebook file contains no valid phonebook entries 3 7 5 Import Phonebook e Nophonebook entry is registered in the export source base unit KX TGP550 only or handset 3 7 6 Export Phonebook 1 Failed Transfer Failure may not be displayed depending on your Web browser Notice Do not click the navigation buttons of your Web browser or open a new window to display the screen Otherwise an error 403 Forbidden will occur when you click Save 3 3 Status This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the Status tab Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 3 1 Version Information 3 3 1 Version Information This screen allows you to view the current version information such as the model number and the firmware version of the unit Panasonic KX TGP550T04 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance Zee Version Information 1 Web Port Close version information Model KX TGP550T04 Botan
71. of joystick gt 5 3 4 2 V a Select Off for Embedded web gt SAVE 3 Base unit gt Handset A Configuring Settings from the Web User Interface To close the unit s Web port 1 Inthe Web user interface click Web Port Close 2 Click OK Note The Web port of the unit will be closed automatically in the following conditions The port close timer configured through the Web user interface expires gt see Port Close Timer in 3 5 4 1 Web Server Settings 3 consecutive unsuccessful login attempts occur Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 49 3 2 2 Accessing the Web User Interface Access Levels IDs and Passwords 2 accounts with different access privileges are provided for accessing the Web user interface User and Administrator Each account has its own ID and password which are required to log in to the Web user interface Account Target User ID default Password default Password Restrictions User End users user blank NULL When logged in as User you can change the password for the User account gt see 3 5 3 Change User Password The password can consist of 6 to 16 ASCII characters case sensitive gt see Entering Characters in 3 2 2 Accessing the Web User Interface Administrator Network administrators etc admin adminpass When logged in as Administrator you can change the passw
72. on the country area of use For details about changing the setting refer to the User Guide on the Panasonic Web site gt see Introduction 1 1 9 Priority of Setting Methods The same settings can be configured by different configuration methods provisioning Web user interface programming etc This section explains which value is applied when the same setting is specified by multiple methods The following table shows the priority with which settings from each method are applied lower numbers indicate higher priority Setting Order Priority Setting Method 1 4 The factory default settings for the unit 2 3 Pre provisioning with the configuration file 2 3 Provisioning with the master configuration file 3 2 2 Provisioning with the product configuration file 2 1 Provisioning with the standard configuration file 4 1 Settings configured from the Web user interface or the phone user interface According to the table settings configured later override previous settings i e settings listed lower in the table have a higher priority If different values are specified for the same setting by the master configuration file and Web user interface programming the value specified from the Web user interface is applied This is because values specified from the Web user interface have a higher priority For settings configured from the Web user interface and the phone user interface the value specified most recently
73. or Internet Explorer 8 0 internet browser Language recommended English Opening Closing the Web Port To access the Web user interface you must open the unit s Web port beforehand For details refer to the User Guide on the Panasonic Web site gt see Introduction 48 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 2 1 Before Accessing the Web User Interface Configuring Settings from the Base Unit KX TGP550 only Handset To open the unit s Web port In cases when buttons soft key icons are shown in English alphabet 1 Base unit MENU middle soft key 5 3 4 Handset MENU center of joystick gt 5 3 4 2 V a Select On for Embedded web gt SAVE 3 Base unit EXIT Handset OFF In cases when buttons soft key icons are shown in symbols pictures 1 Base unit middle soft key 5 3 4 Handset center of joystick gt 5 3 4 2 V a Select On for Embedded web gt SAVE 3 Base unit lt gt Handset A To close the unit s Web port In cases when buttons soft key icons are shown in English alphabet 1 Base unit MENU middle soft key gt 5 3 4 Handset MENU center of joystick gt 5 3 4 2 V a Select Off for Embedded web gt SAVE 3 Base unit EXIT Handset OFF In cases when buttons soft key icons are shown in symbols pictures 1 Base unit middle soft key 5 3 4 Handset center
74. registration before the SIP function shuts down when for example the configuration has changed Value Range e Y Enable registration cancelation before shutting down e N Disable registration cancelation before shutting down Note e If setto Y registration cancelation is enabled e If setto N registration cancelation is disabled even when the SIP stack is shutting down Default Value PORT_PUNCH_INTVL_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example PORT_PUNCH_INTVL_1 PORT_PUNCH_INTVL_2 PORT _PUNCH_INTVL_8 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the interval in seconds between transmissions of the Keep Alive packet to the unit in order to maintain the NAT binding information Note e This setting is available only when SIP_TRANSPORT_ 1 8 is set to 0 for UDP Value Range 0 10 300 0 Disable Default Value 0 Web User Interface Reference Keep Alive Interval Page 90 SIP_SUBS_EXPIRE_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example SIP_SUBS_EXPIRE_1 SIP_SUBS_EXPIRE_2 SIP_SUBS_ EXPIRE 8 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 4 7 2 SIP Settings Value Format Integer Description Specifies the length of time in seconds that the subscription remains valid This value is set in the Expires header of the SUBSCRIBE request Value Range 1 4294967295 Default Value 3600 SUB_RTX_INTVL
75. required for a particular model such as the default setting ofthe privacy mode This configuration file is used by all the units that have the same model name The same number of configuration files as models being used on the network are stored on the provisioning server and units with the same model name download the corresponding configuration file Example of the configuration file s URL http prov example com Panasonic Config MODEL cfg Note When a unit requests the configuration file MODEL is replaced by the model name of the unit Standard configuration file Configure settings that are unique to each unit such as the phone number user ID password etc The same number of configuration files as units are stored on the provisioning server and each unit downloads the corresponding standard configuration file Example of the configuration file s URL http prov example com Panasonic Config MAC cfg Note When a unit requests the configuration file MAC is replaced by the MAC address of the unit Depending on the situation you can use all 3 types of configuration files and can also use only a standard configuration file The above example shows only one possible way to use configuration files Depending on the requirements of your phone system dealer there are a number of ways to use configuration files effectively Using 2 Types of Configuration Files 22 The following table sh
76. same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tih cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 If you include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement Document Version 2010 0
77. specified on the unit or via the Web user interface e Ifthe DNS servers that were specified by the DHCP server or the primary secondary DNS servers that were specified on the unit or via the Web user interface are given priority the unit first sends its requests to those DNS servers If a match is not found the unit then sends its request to the DNS servers that were specified using the configuration file Configuring the Network Settings of the Unit The following procedures explain how to change the network settings via each interface For details about the individual network settings that can be configured via the base unit and handsets or using the Web user interface refer to the Quick Guide on the Panasonic Web site see Introduction or see 3 4 1 Basic Network Settings Configuring Settings from the Base Unit KX TGP550 only Handset To configure network settings automatically In cases when buttons soft key icons are shown in English alphabet 1 Base unit MENU middle soft key 5 0 0 Handset MENU center of joystick gt 5 0 0 2 V a Select on for DHCP SAVE 3 V a Select Automatic for DNS SAVE e Select Manual to enter the addresses for DNS1 primary DNS server and if necessary DNS2 secondary DNS server manually gt SAVE 4 Base unit EXIT Handset OFF Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 15 1 1 3 Basic Network Setup In cases when buttons s
78. the same port number for the source port and destination port and set the unit s private IP address as the destination address Because the unit s private IP address will have to be set in the router s port forwarding configuration again if it is changed set a static IP address to the unit or configure the router so that the same IP address is always assigned to the unit if IP addresses are assigned by a DHCP server For details about how to configure the router refer to the documentation for the router Because the port forwarding settings depend on the user s network environment they cannot be programmed using configuration files 1 1 10 3 Global Address Detection 30 The global IP address is a unique IP address that is assigned to a particular terminal If the global IP address assigned to the firewall or the router is changed the unit will not be able to communicate If the global IP addresses of these terminals are assigned by a DHCP server in the higher level network where they are connected the IP address may differ each time the unit transmits data The Global Address Detection feature detects the current global IP address and if the IP address has changed sets it automatically to the SIP server There are 2 methods using STUN Simple Traversal of UDP through Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 1 2 1 Reset NATs or SIP messages to perform this feature For details about specifying this setting throug
79. to Yes Default Value Not stored No Answer Enable Call Forward 110 Description Selects whether to forward incoming calls to a specified destination when a call is not answered after it has rung a specified number of times Note If Do Not Disturb has been enabled on the server the server rejects incoming calls and the unit does not receive any calls even if you have selected Yes for this setting If you have selected Yes for this setting and Call Forward has been enabled on the server but the forwarding destinations differ incoming calls are forwarded to the destination set on the server If Call Forward has been enabled on the server incoming calls are forwarded to the destination set on the server even if you have selected No for this setting You can synchronize the Do Not Disturb and Call Forward from the Web user interface gt see Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward in 3 7 3 1 Call Control or through configuration file programming gt see SYNCHRONIZATION ENABLE 1 8 in 4 7 1 Call Control Settings If you change this setting when Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward is set to Yes the change to this setting is not immediately applied on this screen In this case reload the screen to confirm that the change is applied Value Range Yes No Default Value No Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 7 3 Call Control Line 1 Li
80. unit will download the configuration file model name cfg stored in the root directory of the TFTP server For example if the model name is KX TGP500B01 the unit will download the configuration file KX TGP500B01 cfg DHCP and TFTP servers may be supplied with your operating system provided through commercial services and are also distributed freely on the Internet Use a server setup that best matches your environment When installing and setting up the DHCP server and TFTP server refer to the documentation supplied with the product For details about connecting servers to the network and managing them consult your network administrator 1 1 5 4 Pre provisioning Setting Example This section gives an example of how to perform pre provisioning Assumptions Item Description Setting TFTP server address 192 168 0 130 Distribution directory of TFTP server tftproot Model name of the unit KX TGP500B01 MAC address of the unit 0080F0123456 Provisioning server name where the configuration file used for provisioning is to be stored provisioning example com Distribution directory of the provisioning server Panasonic File name of the configuration file used for provisioning Config0080F0123456 cfg URL of the configuration file used for provisioning http provisioning example com Panasonic Config0080F0123456 cfg Document Version 2010 03 15 Administra
81. without asking the user automatic when the unit detects a newer version of firmware Note This setting is available only when FIRM UPGRADE ENABLE is set to Y Changing this setting may require restarting the unit Value Range e Y Enable automatic firmware update N Disable automatic firmware update Default Value Y Web User Interface Reference Update Type Page 118 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 4 3 5 Provisioning Settings FIRM_FILE_PATH Value Format String Description Specifies the URL where the firmware file is stored Note e This setting is available only when FIRM UPGRADE ENABLE is set to Y Changing this setting may require restarting the unit Value Range Max 255 characters Note e The format must be RFC 1738 compliant as follows lt schema gt lt user gt lt password gt lt host gt lt port gt lt url path gt lt user gt must be less than 64 characters lt password gt must be less than 64 characters lt user gt lt password gt may be empty The total of lt schema gt and lt host gt lt port gt lt url path gt must be less than 128 characters lt port gt can be omitted if you do not need to specify the port number If mac is included in this URL it will be replaced with the unit s MAC address in lower case s If MAC is included in
82. you select On for DHCP and Automatic for DNS on the unit or you select DHCP for Connection Mode and Receive DNS server address automatically for Domain Name Server in the Web user interface the DNS server settings DNS1 and DNS2 will be ignored even if they have been specified 1 1 4 Overview of Programming You can specify various settings beforehand by creating configuration files This is called pre provisioning Once you have created the configuration files which contain the pre configured settings the unit can then download the files from a server on the Internet and configure its own settings This is called provisioning In addition you can also configure the settings manually To configure them manually use the Web user interface on a PC that is connected to the same network as the unit Web user interface programming or perform setting operations on the unit phone user interface programming 1 1 5 Pre provisioning 1 1 5 1 What is Pre provisioning To perform pre provisioning you must set the IP address of a TFTP server to the DHCP server option 66 so that the unit can acquire the TFTP server address When the unit starts up and no configuration has been applied it will automatically acquire the address of the TFTP server and download the configuration file For details about the configuration file see 1 1 6 3 Configuration File Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 17 1 1 5 Pre provisioning
83. 00 500 500 RINGING TONE _FRQ 440 480 RINGING TONE_TIMING 2000 4000 2000 4000 STT_TONE_FRQ 350 440 STT_TONE_TIMING 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 0 0 REORDER_TONE_FRQ 480 620 REORDER_TONE_TIMING 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 HOWLER_TONE_FRQ 1400 2060 HOWLER_TONE_TIMING 100 100 100 100 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 227 8 2 Comprehensive Example of the Configuration File 228 HOWLER_START_TIME 30 BELL CORE _PATTERN1_TIMING 2000 4000 BELL_CORE_PATTERN2 TIMING 800 400 800 4000 BELL_CORE_PATTERN3 TIMING 400 200 400 200 800 4000 BELL_CORE_PATTERN4_TIMING 300 200 1000 200 300 4000 BELL_CORE_PATTERN5 TIMING 500 DAEAR EEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE HH HH HH HH EEEE HH HH HH EE VoIP Settings DAEAR EEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE Codec Settings SDP_CODECO_1 G722 SDP_CODEC1_1 PCMA SDP_CODEC2_1 G726 32 SDP_CODEC3_1 G729A SDP_CODEC4_1 PCMU SDP_CKRTEO_1 8000 SDP_CKRTE1_1 8000 SDP_CKRTE2_1 8000 SDP_CKRTE3_1 8000 SDP_CKRTE4_1 8000 SDP_PARAMO_1 0 SDP_PARAM1_1 0 SDP_PARAM2 1 0 SDP_PARAM3_1 0 SDP_PARAM4 1 0 SDP_PTYPEO 1 9 SDP_PTYPE1 1 8 SDP_PTYPE2_1 2 SDP_PTYPE3 1 18 SDP_PTYPE4 1 0 CODEC_G711_REQ 1 CODEC_G729_PARAM 0 RTP Settings TOS _RTP_1 0 RTCP_INTVL_1 0 MAX DELAY 1 20 MIN DELAY 1 2 NOM_DELAY_1 2 RTP_PORT_MIN
84. 10 03 15 3 7 3 Call Control Line 1 Line 8 Value Range e Yes es No Note e Ifyou select Yes the conversation cannot be interrupted by another handset or base unit If you select No the conversation can be interrupted by another handset or base unit Default Value Yes Configuration File Reference PRIVACY_MODE 1 8 Page 177 Voice Mail Access Number Description Specifies the phone number used to access the voice mail server Note e Your phone system must support voice mail Value Range Max 24 characters consisting of 0 9 and Note e No other characters are allowed Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference VM_NUMBER 1 8 Page 175 Enable Shared Call Description Selects whether to enable the Shared Call feature of the SIP server which is used to share one line among the units Note e You cannot set both Enable Shared Call and Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward to Yes at the same time e Availability depends on your phone system Value Range e Yes es No Note Ifyou select Yes the SIP server will control the line by using a shared call signaling method If you select No the SIP server will control the line by using a standard signaling method Default Value No Configuration File Reference SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_ 1 8 Page 176 Document Version 2010 03 1
85. 126 Configuration File Parameters 133 Configuration File Programming 125 Configuration File Specifications 132 Configuration Parameter Example 212 Configuring the Network Settings ofthe Unit 15 Confirm New Password 74 75 Connection Mode 59 62 CONNECTION_TYPE 150 Controls on the Window 52 CUSTOM_WEB_PAGE 160 Cyclic Auto Resync 122 D Day of Week 79 80 Daylight Saving Time Summer Time 78 Default 101 Default Gateway 59 64 Detection Interval 70 Detection Method 70 DHCP Server 14 19 143 DHCP Settings 62 DHCP_DNS_ENABLE 151 Dial Plan 106 206 Dial Plan Example 208 Dial Plan Settings 206 Dial Tone 112 DIAL_PLAN_ 1 8 175 DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE 1 8 176 DIAL_TONE_FRQ 162 DIAL_TONE_TIMING 163 Direct Commands 34 Display Name 104 DISPLAY_NAME_ 1 8 195 DNS 86 DNS Server 15 63 151 DNS Server Settings 15 DNS Settings 15 127 153 DNS_PRIORITY 154 DNS_QRY_PRLL 153 DNS1 59 64 DNS1_ADDR 154 DNS2 60 65 DNS2_ADDR 154 Do Not Disturb 106 108 109 110 177 Domain Name Server 63 DST Offset Summer Time Offset 78 DST_ENABLE 136 DST_OFFSET 136 Document Version 2010 03 15 Index DST_START_DAY_OF_WEEK 137 DST_START_MONTH 137 DST_START_ORDINAL_DAY 137 DST_START_TIME 138 DST_STOP_DAY_OF_WEEK 139 DST_STOP_MONTH 138 DST_STOP_ORDINAL_DAY 138 DST_STOP_TIME 139 DTMF 94 DTMF Type 94 E Editing with Microsoft Excel 203 Embedded web 49 Emergency Call Phone Numbers 103 EMERGENCY_CA
86. 132 4 2 2 Configuration File Parameters 2222 Beau 133 4 2 3 Characters Available for String Values 0 0 0 0 eee eeeeennee cece ee nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 134 4 3 En E 134 4 3 1 Re We e CN 134 ADMIN MEP EE 134 TANI PPS eege Ee 135 FS Set E 135 USER EE 135 4 3 2 System TIME Settings E 136 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 Table of Contents RI 136 DSI ENABLE nee ner 136 OR ae al WE 136 BST STARI MON TH ae 137 Del TART ORDINAL DAY EE 137 DST_START DAY OF WEEK sn ee 137 Dei NA EN A EE 138 BST OO ER a nee 138 DST STOP ORDINAL DAY ee en erteilen 138 DST 231 OP DAY OF WEEK tege ee 139 BSI STOR MME ee Ee 139 4 3 3 Syslog SENGS se een 139 SYSLOG EVENT SIP EE 139 SYSLOG EVENT CFG ironii a eana ee re ee 140 eh el E RR 140 SYOLOG EVENT TEE nn ee een 140 SYoLOG ADDR Eeer 141 ch dl ele NEE 141 Ae ele RIPSMEY INT WL WE E 141 4 3 4 Firmware Update Le EE 141 PIR UPGRADE ENABLE eessen enee Eeer eedeEee 141 FIRM ge A ca ad aa nee nee 142 FIRM VER USDECT WEE 142 FIRM UPGRADEAUTO EE 142 FIRMCRICE PAT WEE 143 4 3 5 zee le Titele ie Coenen nee eee ee ee 143 OP THONGS ENABLE geseet Eege ge EE ENEE ENEE 143 PROVISION ENABLE en 2 ee 144 CFG STANDARD FILE PATH eegene ie deiere 144 CFG PRODUCT FIRE EECH eege 145 CFG MASTER FILE PATH EE 146 re I KEV a ae ne ee Eee een 147 CFO El EE 148 CFO BICE KEV ae een 148 CF FIEEIREY LENSTM nennen een ee 148 CFG Eeer 148 CFG hf S ag RTE 1
87. 15 characters Note e Ifthe value for this setting is any value other than an empty string typically check sync or resync is set the unit will access the configuration files on the provisioning server when the SIP server sends an event to notify the unit If the value for this setting is an empty string the unit will not access the configuration files on the provisioning server even if the unit receives a synchronization notification of an event Default Value check sync Configuration File Reference CFG_RESYNC_FROM SIP Page 150 3 8 4 Reset to Defaults This screen allows you to reset the settings made through the Web user interface to their default values by clicking Reset Web Settings After you click this button a dialog box is displayed asking whether you want to reset the settings Click OK to reset or Cancel not to For details about the reset see 1 2 1 2 Resetting the Settings Made through the Web User Interface Reset Web Settings 122 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 8 5 Restart Notice After resetting the settings the base unit will restart even if it is being accessed through the phone user interface or on calls Note e Ifyou have changed the default password for the Administrator account and successfully reset the settings the message Complete is displayed the next time you access the Web user interface the authentication dialog box appears Panasoni
88. 16000 RTP_PORT_MAX 20000 RTP_PTIME 20 Miscellaneous VoIP Settings OUTBANDDTMF_1 Y TELEVENT PTYPE_1 101 RFC2543 HOLD ENABLE 1 Y HE HE HE AE FE FE HE HE HE FE FE FE FE HE HE FE FE FE FE HE E HER FE E E FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE d ERE EHH FE FE FE FE EHH HERE Line Settings HE HE HE FE FE FE FE HE HE FE FE FE FE HE HE FE FE FE FE HE E HE FE FE FE FE E E FE FE FE FE E FE HE FE FE FE d FE FE FE E FE FE FE FE FE FE HE HE FE FE FE HH HH HE Call Control Settings VM_NUMBER_1 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 8 2 Comprehensive Example of the Configuration File DIAL PLAN 1 lt 0111 gt 2 9 xxxxxxxxxS0 lt 011 gt 1 2 9 xxxxxxxxxS0 DIAL PLAN MOT MATCH ENABLE _1 N SHARED _CALL ENABLE_1 Y SHARED USER_ID_1 1234567890a SYNCHRONIZATION ENABLE_1 N PRIVACY _MODE_1 Y SIP Settings SIP_USER_AGENT Panasonic_ MODEL fwver mac SIP_AUTHID 1 SIP1234567890 SIP PASS _1 APDs8S2ja0afAMO72 SIP_SRC_PORT_1 5060 SIP_PRXY_ADDR_1 proxy example com SIP_PRXY_PORT_1 5060 SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_1 registrar example com SIP_RGSTR_PORT_1 5060 SIP_SVCDOMAIN_1 example com REG EXPIRE TIME 1 3600 REG INTERVAL RATE_ 1 90 SIP_SESSION _ TIME 1 0 TOS_SIP_ 1 0 SIP 2NDPROXY ADDR_1 SIP 2NDPROXY PORT 1 5060 SIP_2NDRGSTR_ADDR_1 SIP_2NDRGSTR_PORT_1 5060 SIP_TIMER_T1_1 500 SIP_TIMER_T2_1 4 INVITE _RTXN_1 6 OTHER_RTXN_1 10 SIP_FOVR_NORSP
89. 3 15 Administrator Guide 239 This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence 7 lt lt MD5 gt gt This software uses the Source Code of RSA Data Security Inc described in the RFC1321 MD5 Message Digest Algorithm Copyright C 1991 2 RSA Data Security Inc Created 1991 All rights reserved License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the RSA Data Security Inc MD5 Message Digest Al
90. 4 SIP_ANM HOSTNAME 1 8 Page 194 SIP DETECT SSAF_ 1 8 Page 195 PHONE_NUMBER_ 1 8 Page 195 DISPLAY NAME 1 8 Page 195 INTERNATIONAL ACCESS CODE Page 196 Si This setting can also be configured through the Web user interface 4 2 General Information on the Configuration Files 4 2 1 Configuration File Specifications The specifications of the configuration files are as follows 132 File Format The configuration file is in plain text format File Size The maximum size of a configuration file is 32 768 bytes Regardless of the number of configuration files the total size of the configuration files must be 32 768 bytes or less Lines in Configuration Files A configuration file consists of a sequence of lines with the following conditions Each line must end with lt CR gt lt LF gt The maximum length of a line is 537 bytes including lt CR gt lt LF gt The following lines are ignored Lines that exceed the limit of 537 bytes Empty lines Comment lines that start with Configuration files must start with a comment line containing the following designated character sequence 28 bytes PCC Standard Format File The hexadecimal notation of this sequence is 23 20 50 43 43 20 53 74 61 6E 64 61 72 64 20 46 6F 72 6D 61 74 20 46 69 6C 65 20 22 To prevent the designated character sequence being altered by chance it is recommended that the configuration file starts with the comment line s
91. 4 1 KEE Eege Eegen eege eege 93 RIP Packet OS IESGCP zes ee 93 3 6 4 2 Statistical Information nenneeneeeeeeeeeeer teert te ttttntttrtttesteesrtrnrtnnnn nnr ttttttttttrnteenee nenne nenn 93 RICP Mtera eee e a a a a 93 3 6 4 3 Jitter Buffer 93 Maximum EE 93 Welle len Re E 94 e oe 94 3 6 4 4 RN 94 ee As enk 94 Telephone event Payload Type c ccnccenseeeeescsenceneeeeeeeseresscneaneesseeesenenennenies 95 3 6 4 5 call Hold RE 95 S pports RFC 2543 650 0 0 0 E 95 3 6 4 6 CODEC SUING Sinaine EE 95 alu a8 8 Sl oreas enaa e EURE a a E E ESE SEE 95 6 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 Table of Contents Ee beet EE Ee ene 96 Tard CODEC aeann a A E E E E 96 tin 8 rian E a E r a E A E aane E EA 97 EINE OS ae ee ee er 97 3 7 Ee ue EE 98 3 7 1 M lti N mber Settings ee are ee 98 3 7 1 1 Grouping Handset Handset selection for receiving calls 2222424424 44H 99 Lena eege 99 Fale gt MSMERUNBEREURERREOREREEDERDIUREPLPELFTEREE EBIRLELEILEUSPOREEIRERELTEERECPELSIRPERTEDLVERPEPRTCEEFOLTEER 99 HandSetNo sense ser en ee 100 Base KX TGP550 Only een unseren seadaneseccttens 100 3 7 1 2 Handset and Line No selection for making calls nn nennen 100 ellene DE Te EE 100 Base KX TOP550 ONIY cricca raaa EE OE EE EER 100 e Te EE 100 De AU ee ee ee een 101 3 7 2 Call MU atasa eh eo E a E a a E eens 101 3 7 2 1 Call en e EE 102 Send SUBSCRIBE to Voice Mail Server eee ee eee e eee e ee
92. 49 CFG RIRY MIN AE 149 PRE d een 149 CPG RESTING FROM TEE 150 4 4 Network le D 150 4 4 1 IP lee een euere 150 CONNECTION TYPE an san codec te anea a N E aa 150 el CH TE 151 DACP DNS ENABLE 2 eebe tee cei gee eg 151 SIA NC HEEN 151 CHEN e TE WEE 152 SIA NC GATEWAY ee 152 USER DNSI ADDR Eege eege EE 153 USER DODNS2 ADDR 2 22 22 153 4 4 2 ONS e 153 DNS SORY PROLES een 153 AT e A EN 154 EE ee 154 DNS ADDR eege eeh 154 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 9 Table of Contents 4 4 3 Ethernet Port Settings srir ieina eiiiai aia iaaa iaai EEA anika E Eai 155 VLAN_ENABLE EES 155 VLAN_ID_IP_PHONE KX TGP550 only au anesesnae 155 VLAN_PRI_IP_PHONE KX TGP550 ON Ye 155 VLAN_ID_PC KX TGP550 only ans ee ee Ee enieeg 156 VLAN_PRI_PC KX TGP550 only re ea ea 156 4 4 4 wl RR lee E 156 el Bh VER EE 156 HIT USER AGENT 1t stt rrtt rttr ktts rtasrterrtsreer ranr tan 157 HTTP SSL VERIF an ee a ae 157 CEG BOOT CERTIEIGATE BATH s sssisssissieesieeeriesrieereesriesiessrtssrtssressrresrrenressrrns 158 4 4 5 Time Adj st SUNS acess tat a ise ee dee 158 NTP ADOR E 158 TIME SYNC IN RE 159 TIME QUERY INTVE E 159 4 4 6 STUN Settings anne ernennt 159 SIUN SERV eege Eege DEER geg 159 STUNLSERV A EE 159 STUN_2NDSERV_ADDR EE 159 STUN 2S Oy A E 160 4 4 7 Miscellaneous Network Settings nennen anna 160 UE H e TE 160 CUSTOM WEB PAGE aus EE EE EEN sateeasdtendaysnies 160 4 5 Telephone Settings tices sassiuncnctn
93. 5 Administrator Guide 105 3 7 3 Call Control Line 1 Line 8 Unique ID of Shared Call Description Specifies the unique ID used by the SIP server when Enable Shared Call is set to Yes Value Range Max 24 characters Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference SHARED_USER_ID_ 1 8 Page 177 Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward Description Selects whether to synchronize the Do Not Disturb and Call Forward settings configured via the Web user interface or phone user interface between the unit and the portal server that is provided by your phone system dealer Note e Even if you select Yes this feature may not function properly if your phone system does not support it Before you configure this setting consult your phone system dealer e You cannot set both Enable Shared Call and Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward to Yes at the same time Value Range e Yes es No Default Value No Configuration File Reference SYNCHRONIZATION_ENABLE_ 1 8 Page 177 3 7 3 2 Dial Plan Dial Plan Description Specifies a dial format such as specific phone numbers that control which numbers can be dialed or how to handle the call when making a call For details see 5 3 Dial Plan Value Range Max 500 characters Note Entering more than 500 characters in this field causes an error and the previous value rem
94. 5 2 Pre provisioning when Setting Static IP Addresses 18 To perform pre provisioning the unit needs to acquire the TFTP server address from option 66 on a DHCP server Therefore pre provisioning cannot be performed if you use static IP addressing on your network If you use static IP addressing and want to perform pre provisioning construct a small separate network and connect a DHCP and TFTP server to that network In addition if option 66 of the DHCP server cannot be set or if you are unauthorized to change this setting perform pre provisioning on the separate network and then connect the unit to the actual network Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 1 1 5 Pre provisioning 1 1 5 3 Server for Pre provisioning The DHCP server and TFTP server play important roles in performing pre provisioning This section explains their purposes uses and brief descriptions Server Purpose Description DHCP server units that have not been configured yet Used to provide the address of a TFTP server set in option 66 of the DHCP server to In option 66 of the DHCP server specify the IP address or FQDN Fully Qualified Domain Name of the TFTP server For details refer to the documentation for your DHCP server Note The maximum length of FQDN text is 64 bytes TFTP server automatically Used to store configuration files and is set as the access point for downloading them The
95. 97 The NetBSD Foundation Inc All rights reserved Copyright c 1999 The NetBSD Foundation Inc All rights reserved Copyright c 2001 The NetBSD Foundation Inc All rights reserved Copyright c 1996 Gardner Buchanan lt gbuchanan shl com gt All rights reserved Parts of the NetBSD Kernel are provided with the licenses that are slightly different from the above Berkeley formed license Please refer the source code of the NetBSD Kernel about the details The source code of the NetBSD Kernel is provided by the NetBSD CVS Repositories http cvsweb netbsd org bsdweb cgi and this product includes parts of the source code in the following directories http cvsweb netbsd org bsdweb cgi src sys kern http cvsweb netbsd org bsdweb cgi src sys net http cvsweb netbsd org bsdweb cgi src sys netinet lt lt OpenSSL gt gt The product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project and it is used under the following license LICENSE ISSUES The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license i e both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit See below for the actual license texts Actually both licenses are BSD style Open Source licenses In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact openssl core openssl org OpenSSL License Copyright c 1998 2004 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or withou
96. ARD_FILE_PATH http host dir becomes CFG STANDARD FILE PATH http host dir Config mac cfg Default Value Empty string Note e The URL specified by your phone system dealer may be preset in the unit Web User Interface Reference Standard File URL Page 121 CFG_PRODUCT_FILE_PATH Value Format String Description Specifies the URL of the product configuration file which is used when all units with the same model number need the same settings Note e When you change this setting set PROVISION_ENABLE to Y at the same time Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 145 4 3 5 Provisioning Settings Value Range Max 255 characters Note e The format must be RFC 1738 compliant as follows lt schema gt lt user gt lt password gt lt host gt lt port gt lt url path gt lt user gt must be less than 64 characters lt password gt must be less than 64 characters lt user gt lt password gt may be empty The total of lt schema gt and lt host gt lt port gt lt url path gt must be less than 128 characters lt port gt can be omitted if you do not need to specify the port number If mac is included in this URL it will be replaced with the unit s MAC address in lower case s If MAC is included in this URL it will be replaced with the unit s MAC address in upper case e If MO
97. AT Traversal 29 72 Network 41 Network Settings 127 150 Network Status 58 222 Network Tab 41 61 New Password 74 75 No Answer Enable Call Forward 110 No Answer Phone Number 111 No Answer Ring Count 111 NOM_DELAY_ 1 8 172 Non INVITE Retry Count 88 NOTES 2 NTP Server Address 78 NTP_ADDR 158 NW_SETTING_ENABLE 160 O Opening Closing the Web Port 48 Operating BANK 57 OPTION66_ENABLE 143 Other Network Settings 28 OTHER_RTXN_ 1 8 185 OUTBANDDTMF_ 1 8 174 Outbound Proxy Server 85 Outbound Proxy Server Address 85 Outbound Proxy Server Port 85 Overview of Programming 17 P PC Priority 36 67 PC VLAN ID 36 67 PC port 35 PC Port 66 Phone Number 60 83 99 246 Administrator Guide Phone User Interface Feature List and Direct Commands 34 Phone User Interface Programming 17 28 33 34 PHONE_NUMBER 1 8 195 Phonebook Data in Binary Format 202 Phonebook Data in Text Format 201 Port Close Timer 76 Port Forwarding 29 PORT_PUNCH_INTVL_ 1 8 190 Pre provisioning 17 Presence Server Address 84 Presence Server Port 84 Primary DNS Server 15 59 63 64 153 154 Priority of Setting Methods 28 PRIVACY_MODE _ 1 8 177 Product Configuration File 22 121 145 Product File URL 121 PROVISION_ENABLE 144 Provisioning 17 21 Provisioning Maintenance 23 120 Provisioning Server 20 24 Provisioning Settings 23 127 143 Proxy Server Address 69 84 Proxy Server Port 69 84 Proxy Server Settings 69 Q Q
98. CFG CYCLIC Page 148 CFG _CYCLIC_INTVL Page 149 CFG_RTRY_INTVL Page 149 CFG_RESYNC_TIME Page 149 CFG_RESYNC_FROM SIP Page 150 1 This setting can also be configured through the Web user interface Network Settings Category Parameter Name Ref IP Settings CONNECTION TYPE Page 150 HOST_NAME Page 151 DHCP_DNS_ENABLE Page 151 STATIC IP ADDRESS Page 151 STATIC SUBNET Page 152 STATIC GATEWAY Page 152 USER_DNS1_ADDR Page 153 USER_DNS2_ADDR Page 153 DNS Settings DNS_ORY_PRLL Page 153 DNS_PRIORITY Page 154 DNS1_ADDR Page 154 DNS2_ADDR Page 154 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 127 4 1 Configuration File Parameter List Category Parameter Name Ref Ethernet Port Settings VLAN_ENABLE Page 155 VLAN_ID_IP_PHONE Page 155 VLAN_PRI_IP_PHONE Page 155 VLAN_ID_PC Page 156 VLAN_PRI_PC Page 156 HTTP Settings HTTP_VER Page 156 HTTP_USER_AGENT Page 157 HTTP_SSL_VERIFY Page 157 CFG_ROOT CERTIFICATE PATH Page 158 Time Adjust Settings NTP ADDR Page 158 TIME SYNC_INTVL Page 159 TIME QUERY_INTVL Page 159 STUN Settings STUN_SERV_ADDR Page 159 STUN_SERV_PORT Page 159 STUN_2NDSERV_ADDR Page 159 STUN_2NDSERV_PORT Page 160 Miscellaneous Network Settings NW_SETTING_ENABLE Page 160 CUSTOM_WEB_PAGE Page 160 1 programming 2 This setting can also be configured through the Web user interface
99. DEL is included in this URL it will be replaced with the unit s model name s H fwver is included in this URL it will be replaced with the unit s firmware version s If this URL ends with slash MODEL cfg is automatically added at the end of the URL For example CFG_PRODUCT FILE PATH http host dir becomes CFG_PRODUCT_FILE_PATH http host dir MODEL cfg Default Value Empty string Note e The URL specified by your phone system dealer may be preset in the unit Web User Interface Reference Product File URL Page 121 CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH Value Format String Description Specifies the URL of the master configuration file which is used when all units need the same settings Note e When you change this setting set PROVISION_ENABLE to Y at the same time 146 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 4 3 5 Provisioning Settings Value Range Max 255 characters Note e The format must be RFC 1738 compliant as follows lt schema gt lt user gt lt password gt lt host gt lt port gt lt url path gt lt user gt must be less than 64 characters lt password gt must be less than 64 characters lt user gt lt password gt may be empty The total of lt schema gt and lt host gt lt port gt lt url path gt must be less than 128 characters lt port gt can be omitted if y
100. DP_CODEC4 2 PCMU SDP_CKRTEO_2 8000 SDP_CKRTE1_2 8000 SDP_CKRTE2_2 8000 SDP_CKRTE3_2 8000 SDP_CKRTE4_2 8000 SDP_PARAMO_2 0 SDP_PARAM1_2 0 SDP_PARAM2_2 0 SDP_PARAM3_2 0 SDP_PARAM4 2 0 SDP_PTYPEO 2 9 SDP_PTYPE1 2 8 SDP_PTYPE2_2 2 SDP_PTYPE3_2 18 SDP_PTYPE4 2 0 RTP Settings TOS _RTP_2 0 RTCP_INTVL_2 0 MAX DELAY 2 20 MIN DELAY _2 2 NOM DELAY 2 2 Miscellaneous VoIP Settings OUTBANDDTMF 2 Y TELEVENT_PTYPE_2 101 RFC2543 HOLD ENABLE 2 Y HEH EHH EH E FE HE FE FE FE FE AE ET EH ET ET ET FE E FE RE RH EH RH RH EH HR RE Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 8 2 Comprehensive Example of the Configuration File Line Settings HE HE E FE FE FE HE HE HE FE FE FE FE HE HE FE FE FE FE HE E HE FE FE FE FE E E FE FE ERR HE FE EHH RRR FE FE ETH FE FE FE FE FE HE HE FE FE FE HH HH HE Call Control Settings VM_NUMBER 2 DIAL PLAN 2 lt 0111 gt 2 9 xxxxxxxxxS0 lt 011 gt 1 2 9 xxxxxxxxxS0 DIAL _ PLAN NOT_MATCH ENABLE 2 N SHARED CALL ENABLE 2 Y SHARED _USER_ID _2 1234567891a SYNCHRONIZATION ENABLE 2 N PRIVACY MODE Zenn SIP Settings SIP_AUTHID 2 SIP1234567891 SIP_PASS _2 J8uajAHFK3AHFSAla SIP_SRC_PORT_2 5070 SIP_PRXY ADDR_2 proxy example com SIP_PRXY_PORT_2 5060 SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_2 registrar example com SIP_RGSTR_PORT_2 5060 SIP_SVCDOMAIN 2 example com REG EXPIRE TIME 2 3600 REG INTERVAL RATE _2 90
101. E FE HE FE FE HE HE FE FE HE HE HEHE CFG_STANDARD FILE PATH http config example com 0123456789AB cfg URL of this configuration file HERE EE AEE AEE HE FE EE AE E HE BEE E FE FE AE HE HE EE EA EAE AE HE FE FE E EE HB EH EH HEHE SIP Settings Suffix _1 indicates this parameter is for line 1 HEE AE AEE ER EE A AE AE HE aE E FE FE AE EH EE EA AE BEE A EB EE BH HEHE SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_1 registrar example com IP Address or FQDN of SIP registrar server SIP_PRXY_ADDR_1 proxy example com IP Address or FQDN of proxy server Enables DNS SRV lookup SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_1 Y ID password for SIP authentication SIP_AUTHID 1 SIP_User SIP_PASS_1 SIP_Password Some Timer Settings Expiration time of SIP registration 1 hour REG_EXPIRE_TIME 1 3600 Disables SIP Session Timer RFC 4028 SIP_SESSION_TIME_1 0 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 233 8 3 Example with Incorrect Descriptions 234 SIP phone number PHONE_NUMBER_1 1234567890 Caller ID passed to opposite party DISPLAY NAME 1 1234567890 VoIP Setting DTMF will be sent through SDP according to RFC 2833 OUTBANDDTMF 1 ny FE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE FE HE HE FE FE HH FE FE HE HE FE HE HE HE FE FE FE HE FE HE E HH HE E FE FE HE HE FE FE HE HARES FE FE HE HE FE HERE TH HEE Call Control Settings FE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE FE HE HE FE HE HE HE FE HE HE HE FE FE E FE FE HE E FE FE HE E FE FE HE HE FE FE
102. EEN Update Type v Page 118 Firmware File URL vi Page 119 Local Firmware Local Firmware Update Encryption v Page 119 SES File Name v Page 120 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 47 3 2 1 Before Accessing the Web User Interface Access Menu Item Section Title Setting Level Ref U A Provisioning Provisioning Enable Provisioning v Page 120 Maintenance Maintenance Standard File URL P Page 121 Product File URL v Page 121 Master File URL v Page 121 Cyclic Auto Resync v Page 122 Resync Interval v Page 122 Header Value for Resync v Page 122 Event Reset to Defaults v Page 122 Restart v Page 123 1 The access levels are abbreviated as follows U User A Administrator A check mark indicates that the setting is available for that access level 7 This setting can also be configured through configuration file programming 3 2 Programming Instructions 3 2 1 Before Accessing the Web User Interface Recommended Environment This unit supports the following specifications HTTP Version HTTP 1 0 RFC 1945 HTTP 1 1 RFC 2616 Authentication Method Digest or Basic The Web user interface will operate correctly in the following environments Operating System Microsoft Windows XP or Windows Vista operating system Web Browser Internet Explorer 6 0 Windows XP only Internet Explorer 7 0
103. EENT REEERE EE ESTERO ETARE 85 Service Domain cccccccccccceccceccceccceeceeeececeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeseeeeeneeteeeeness 85 3 6 2 5 SIP Source POM E 85 SOUCO ROM EE 85 3 6 2 6 SIP Authentication 22 0 0 cccccccccceeecccee cece ee eeaeeeaaeeaaaeaaaeaaseeaaeaeasaneesseeseseeeeeseeeeeeeeeteeees 86 Authentication ID 86 Authentication Password 86 3 6 2 7 leede eege ee 86 Enable DNS SRV lookup cece ccec ccc ee cece acca ee eeeeeeeeeeeececeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeaaaa 86 SRV lookup Prefix for UDP 220uuuunnsnnneennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 87 SRV lookup Prefix for TC 87 3 6 2 8 Fimer Settings SSRNERERAEPEREPERPEDEBELDERENTBERLLUERLEPEERFOTURPETRERFELERERLPLRETPEEEPLTEBEHBEERAEEER PEPIDEIRERERLERLAEN 87 NW HU TEE 87 TZ NU EE 88 INVITE EE ee 88 Non INVITE Retry Count EE 88 3 6 2 9 Q ality of Service QOS E 89 SIP Packet QoS DSCP E 89 3 6 2 10 IER E Ee e EE 89 SUP MONS RE 89 Supports Session Timer RFC 4028 EE 90 3 6 2 11 eege Ee EE ees 90 Keep Alive Internal 90 3 6 2 12 EENEG 90 Enable SSAF SIP Source Address Filter 2 cccceeerereeseececeeneeeeseenseeeeeeneneees 90 3 6 3 A ae ie Te EE 91 3 6 3 1 RIP aN CN 91 RTP Packet Time ccccccccccccceccceccccecceeeceeeceeeceneceaeceaaenaaeaaaenaaaeeaaeeeaeeaaanaaaaaaaaeaaanaes 91 Minimum RTP Port Number 91 Maximum RTP Port Number 92 3 6 4 VoIP Settings Line tlmnegl 92 3 6
104. G 711 p law Note You can select each codec on once within CODEC Settings A maximum of 5 priorities can be assigned If only 4 codecs are specified in a configuration file you will be able to select from only 4 codecs and Fifth CODEC will be disabled The codec selections that are displayed may vary depending on the unit or the operating environment Default Value PCMA Configuration File Reference SDP_CODEC 0 4 _ 1 8 Page 167 Third CODEC Description Selects the codec to assign the third highest priority to 96 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 6 4 VoIP Settings Line 1 Line 8 Value Range 6722 PCMA G 711 A law G726 32 G 726 32k G729A BCMU G 711 u law Note You can select each codec on once within CODEC Settings A maximum of 5 priorities can be assigned If only 4 codecs are specified in a configuration file you will be able to select from only 4 codecs and Fifth CODEC will be disabled The codec selections that are displayed may vary depending on the unit or the operating environment Default Value G726 32 Configuration File Reference SDP_CODEC 0 4 1 8 Page 167 Fourth CODEC Description Selects the codec to assign the 4th highest priority to Value Range 6722 PCMA G 711 A law G726 32 G 726 32k G729A PCMU G 711 u law Note You can se
105. HE HE FE FE HE HE FE FE HE HE FE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HHHH Enables subscription to the Voice Mail server VM_SUBSCRIBE_ENABLE Yes Shared Call Settings SHARED _CALL_ENABLE_1 SHARED _USER_ID_1 1234567890a Disables Do Not Disturb Call Forward synchronization SYNCHRONIZATION ENABLE 1 N Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 Document Version 2010 03 15 Section 9 Open Source Software Parts of this product use Open Source Software Relevant conditions apply to this software Panasonic cannot accept inquiries regarding the content of the following copyright and licence information Administrator Guide 235 lt lt NetBSD kernel gt gt This product uses a part of NetBSD kernel The use of a part of NetBSD kernel is based on the typical BSD style license below Copyright c The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must disp
106. IEEPEIREPIEUEBEDERLEBEREN 21 1 1 6 4 Downloading Configuration Files au 23 1 1 6 5 Provisioning Server Setting Example ssssssssssseseirrrrrssssssssstritnrtrrrrnrnrnsssssssssrreeenns 24 1 1 6 6 EHEN DON ege een 25 1 1 7 Web User Interface Programming umrsssrs4444000HH HR Rn nenn nnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnen 27 1 1 7 1 Password for Web User Interface Programming ss 27 1 1 7 2 Changing the Language for Web User Interface Programming 00 27 1 1 8 Phone User Interface Programming s 44 44004082 0400 Hansen anna 28 1 1 8 1 Changing the Language for Phone User Interface Programming 000 28 1 1 9 Priority of Setting Methods ac stenoses ntebrereeesasetece 28 1 1 10 Other Network Settings Eege eege 28 1 1 10 1 Firewall and Router Setup cceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaaaaaaaeaeeeneeeeeees 28 1 1 10 2 NAT Network Address Translation Setup ceeeee cece cece cette eeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaee 29 1 1 10 3 Elle Ee Re EE 30 1 2 Reset and Firmware Update icc lt ccsccscveceieseriesevcessvoceecccevstescescstecctesccssnscccasctessoavssevsensvvensis 31 1 2 1 E 31 1 2 1 1 Resetting the Network Settings IP Reset usumm44444444444aHnaHananannnnnnnnnnnnn nn 31 1 2 1 2 Resetting the Settings Made through the Web User Interface Reset Web lee E 32 1 2 2 Firmware lee E 32 2 Phone User Interface Programming ue KEREN 33 2 1 Phone User Interface Prog
107. IME 166 HOWLER_TONE_FRQ 165 HOWLER_TONE_TIMING 165 HTTP Client Settings 68 HTTP Settings 128 156 HTTP User Agent 68 HTTP Version 68 HTTP_SSL_VERIFY 157 HTTP_USER_AGENT 157 HTTP_VER 156 HTTPS 25 26 Import Button 202 Import Phonebook 115 116 202 Import Export File Format 201 Import Export Operation 202 Incorrect Example 233 Initial Delay 94 INTDIGIT_TIM 162 Inter digit Timeout 102 INTERNATIONAL ACCESS CODE 196 INVITE Retry Count 88 INVITE_RTXN_ 1 8 185 IP Address 59 IP Phone Priority 36 67 IP Phone VLAN ID 36 66 IP Reset 31 36 IP Settings 127 150 IPL Version 57 J Jitter Buffer 93 K Keep Alive 90 Keep Alive Interval 90 L LAN port 35 LAN Port 65 Language 73 Language Selection 14 27 28 73 Language Selection for the Unit 14 Line 1 Line8 72 Line No 60 99 100 Line Settings 130 175 Link Speed Duplex Mode 65 Administrator Guide 245 Index Local Firmware Update 119 213 Login Account Settings 126 134 MAC Address 58 Maintenance 47 Maintenance Tab 47 118 Master Configuration File 22 121 146 Master File URL 121 MAX_DELAY_ 1 8 171 Maximum Delay 93 Maximum RTP Port Number 92 Microsoft Excel 199 203 Microsoft Outlook 200 205 MIN_DELAY_ 1 8 172 Minimum Delay 94 Minimum RTP Port Number 91 Miscellaneous Network Settings 128 160 Miscellaneous VoIP Settings 130 174 Model 57 Month 79 80 Multi Number Settings 98 198 N NAPT 71 NAT 29 71 90 190 N
108. INAL_DAY 1 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 225 8 2 Comprehensive Example of the Configuration File 226 DST_STOP_DAY_OF_WEEK 0 DST_STOP_TIME 120 Syslog Settings SYSLOG_EVENT_SIP 0 SYSLOG_EVENT_CFG 0 SYSLOG_EVENT_VOIP 0 SYSLOG_EVENT_TEL 0 SYSLOG _ADDR logserver example com SYSLOG _PORT 514 SYSLOG_RTPSMLY_INTVL_1 20 Firmware Update Settings FIRM UPGRADE ENABLE Y FIRM _VER_EUDECT not needed for US DECT phone FIRM_VER_USDECT 01 01 FIRM UPGRADE AUTO Y FIRM FILE PATH http firmserver example com MODEL fw Provisioning Settings OPTION66 ENABLE Y PROVISION _ENABLE Y CFG STANDARD FILE PATH http provisioning example com Config mac cfg CFG PRODUCT FILE _PATH CFG MASTER FILE PATH http provisioning example com ConfigCommon cfg CFG FILE KEY1 Not to overwrite factory default key CFG_FILE KEY2 CFG_FILE KEY3 CFG_FILE KEY LENGTH 128 CFG_CYCLIC N CFG_CYCLIC_INTVL 10080 CFG_RTRY_INTVL 30 CFG_RESYNC_TIME CFG_RESYNC_FROM SIP check sync DAEAR EEEE EEE EEE EEEE EEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EE EEEE EEEE EEEE Network Settings DAEAR EEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE IP Settings CONNECTION_TYPE 1 HOST_NAME TGP550 DHCP_DNS_ENABLE N STATIC_IP_ADDRESS STATIC _SUBNET STATIC _GATEWAY USER_DNS1_ADDR USER_DNS2_ADDR DNS Settings DNS ORT PRLL Y
109. Interface Programming This section provides information about the features that can be configured directly from the base unit or handsets but that are not mentioned in the User Guide To enter direct commands use the keys and soft keys on the base unit KX TGP550 only or handset For details about the other available features settings and key operations on the phone user interface refer to the User Guide on the Panasonic Web site gt see Introduction 2 1 1 Phone User Interface Feature List and Direct Commands The following table shows additional features programmable with direct commands These commands are hidden from end users Beie d Feature Ref 5 3 0 Speed Duplex LAN port Page 34 PC port VLAN setting Enable VLAN Page 35 IP Phone VLAN ID Priority PC VLAN ID Priority 71 3 0 IP Reset Page 36 71 3 1 Terminal No Page 37 7 3 9 Reset Web ID Password Page 38 Available for KX TGP550 only 2 Contact your phone system dealer for further information 7 Not displayed on the LCD of the unit 2 1 2 Speed Duplex Settings You can select the connection mode combination of link speed and duplex mode of the LAN port and PC port KX TGP550 only You can select from the following values Auto default e 10M Full e 10M Half e 100M Full e 100M Half For details about configuring the speed duplex setting from the Web user i
110. Ke 158 see 187 SIE TEP SRYV PREFIX 1 8 22er 187 SIP A00REL ENABLE EE 188 SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_ 1 8 EE 188 SIP_PRSNC ADDR NEE EE 188 SIP PRSNC PORI SO BE 189 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 11 Table of Contents 12 SIP_2NDPRSNG ADDR 1 6 sisicsssscctdectsccssiccisdecsnieasnicstscesssdensnlesasdectisateniaiceemiuided 189 SIP ZNDPRONG FORT NEE 189 USE DEL REG OPEN 1 8 aaa aaa 189 USE DEL REG CLOSE EE 190 PORT PUNGH JUN PVE TB nen aan 190 SIP SUBS EXPIRE KEE 190 SUB CAR GARE NEE 191 REG RTX INT E ee A ae EE Eara eens a Ersta 191 lP_P PREFERRED ID 1 8 anhand 191 SIP PRIVACY TI 192 ADD USER PHONE 1 8 192 SOP USERID TI Blondinen 192 SUB_INTERVAL_RATE_ 1 8 ccccssessessssssecesseceeceeeeeessssseseeeeeaesesseeeseesssessseees 192 SIP OUTPROAY ADDR IB aa a 193 SIP_OUTPROXY PORT MB nennen nn 193 SIP TRANSPORT IB Area een 193 SE ANM DISPNAME_ 1 8 wcecicccncsssscccscccastesessassncsancccentessnedesstiniaccsnecsenccensensnmesecsses 194 SlP ANM USERNAME TI seen ana 194 SIP_ANM HOS TINAME 198 nee 194 SIP _DETECT_SSAF PB Eeer ege Eege 195 PROM NUMBER 198 asad vseosihtecstesctaecdlcthccketsanttcndutdesatadiateadenntoanmbersunsacatieataas 195 DISPLAY NAME 158 EE 195 INTERNATIONAL ACCESS CODE EEN EEN 196 5 Useful Telephone Functions 0 ccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseneeneesenes 197 5 1 Line Settings for Base Unit and Handset uuuuss
111. LL 1 5 161 Enable DNS SRV lookup 86 Enable DST Enable Summer Time 78 Enable Firmware Update 118 Enable Global IP Address Usage per Line 72 Enable Privacy Mode 104 Enable Provisioning 120 Enable Proxy 69 Enable Shared Call 105 Enable SSAF SIP Source Address Filter 90 Enable Synchronization by NTP 77 Enable VLAN 35 66 Encryption 25 119 Encryption Key 25 147 148 End Day and Time of DST End Day and Time of Summer Time 80 Entering Characters 53 Ethernet Link Status LAN Port 58 Ethernet Link Status PC Port 58 Ethernet Port Settings 65 128 155 Export Button 202 Export Phonebook 117 202 Exporting Data from Microsoft Outlook 205 External RTP Port 72 F Factory Defaults Fifth CODEC 97 File Name 116 120 FIRM_FILE_PATH 143 FIRM_UPGRADE_AUTO 142 FIRM_UPGRADE_ENABLE 141 FIRM_VER_EUDECT 142 FIRM_VER_USDECT 142 Firmware File URL 119 Firmware Maintenance 118 212 Firmware Server 32 212 Firmware Update 32 118 141 211 213 Firmware Update Settings 126 141 212 Firmware Version 57 First CODEC 95 FIRSTDIGIT_TIM 162 Fourth CODEC 97 14 31 36 38 G Global Address Detection 30 70 Document Version 2010 03 15 Global IP Address 72 Grouping Handset Handset selection for receiving calls 99 H Handset or Base Unit 116 117 Handset and Line No selection for making calls 100 Handset No 100 Header Value for Resync Event 122 Host Name 62 HOST_NAME 151 Howler Tone 115 HOWLER_START_T
112. Match is set to No the call is denied after the inter digit timer expires Ifthe dialed phone number is 21 91 and so on when Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match is set to No the call is denied Example 2346789 11 01 2 9 xx 2 9 xxxxxxxxx e Ifthe dialed phone number is 21234567 598765432 and so on when Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match is set to Yes the call is made after the inter digit timer expires Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 5 3 1 Dial Plan Settings e Ifthe dialed phone number is 21234567 598765432 and so on when Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match is set to Yes the call is made immediately e Ifthe dialed phone number is 21234567 598765432 and so on when Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match is set to No the call is denied after the inter digit timer expires e If the dialed phone number is 21234567 598765432 and so on when Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match is set to No the call is denied No Match Example 2346789 11 01 2 9 xx 2 9 xxxxxxxxx e Ifthe dialed phone number is 0011 1011 and so on when Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match is set to Yes the call is made after the inter digit timer expires e Ifthe dialed phone number is 0011 1011 and so on when Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match is set to Yes the call is made immediately Ifthe dialed phone number is 0011 1011 and so on when Call
113. P550 only or the handset that you want to export data from Click Export On the Now Processing File Data screen click the text HERE in the displayed message or wait until File Download window appears Note Depending on the security settings of your Web browser pop up menus might be blocked If the file cannot be exported successfully try the export operation again or change the security settings of your Web browser Click Save on File Download window On the Save As window select a folder to save the exported phonebook data to enter the file name in File name select TSV File for Save as type and click Save If the file is downloaded successfully the Download complete window appears Click Close To exit the operation click the text HERE in the displayed message The Export Phonebook screen returns Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 5 2 2 Editing with Microsoft Excel Note Make sure that the import source or target unit base unit or handset is in standby mode The import source or target unit base unit or handset must be specified at the time of import export The imported data is added to the existing phonebook data If the existing phonebook data has an entry with the same name as the imported entry but the phone number is different the imported entry is added as a new entry If the existing phonebook data has an entry with the same name and phone number as an imported entry the
114. Panasonic Administrator Guide SIP Cordless Phone Model No KX TG P500 KX TGP550 Thank you for purchasing a Panasonic product Please read this guide before using the unit and save it for future reference Document Version 2010 03 15 Introduction Introduction This Administrator Guide provides detailed information on the configuration and management of this unit This Administrator Guide is available on the Panasonic Web site at http panasonic net pcc support sipphone Audience This Administrator Guide contains explanations about the installation maintenance and management of the unit and is aimed at network administrators and phone system dealers Technical descriptions are included in this guide Prior knowledge of networking and VoIP Voice over Internet Protocol is required Related Documentation Related documentation includes the Quick Guide and the User Guide Refer to these guides when needed Quick Guide Explains basic information about the installation and operation of the unit This guide is provided with the unit or on the Panasonic Web site at http panasonic net pcc support sipphone e User Guide Explains necessary information for end users to operate and customize the unit This guide is provided on the Panasonic Web site at http panasonic net pcc support sipphone Technical Support When technical support is required contact your phone system dealer Trademarks e Microsoft
115. RED USER_ID_1 1234567890a Disables Do Not Disturb Call Forward synchronization SYNCHRONIZATION ENABLE 1 N 8 2 Comprehensive Example of the Configuration File The following listing shows an example of a comprehensive configuration file In this example settings with the same values as the default settings are also shown If the setting already has the desired value changing or specifying a value is unnecessary and the setting can be omitted Comprehensive Example PCC Standard Format File DO NOT CHANGE THIS LINE HE HE EH ETH EHH FE FE FE FE FE ETH RH FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE FE HE FE FE ETHER EHH This is a sample configuration file Most of the parameters below are just default values HEH EHE HEHE HE FE E FEE FE HE FE FE E FE E FE E FE E FE HE FE FE AE HE E FE E FE E FE EE FE FE RH EH E FE EE HH HH EHH RH HHHH HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE FE HE HE HE HE EE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HE HH HH HE System Settings AAEE EEEE EEE EE EEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE Login Account Settings ADMIN_ID Jones ADMIN_PASS HCeDUg4GqqDF9Jp1 USER_ID Smith USER_PASS 1hQ8B5hqoHgOlaAu System Time Settings TIME_ZONE 300 DST_ENABLE Y DST_OFFSET 60 DST_START_MONTH 3 DST_START_ORDINAL DAY 2 DST START DAY OF WEEK 0 DST_START_TIME 120 DST_STOP_MONTH 11 DST_STOP_ORD
116. RESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tih cryptsoft com Original SSLeay License Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA Ihash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the
117. Setup Using a Static IP Address Specified by Your Network Administrator If IP addresses for network devices are specified individually by your network administrator you will need to manually configure settings such as the IP address subnet mask default gateway and DNS servers from either the base unit or one of the handsets For details about the required network settings consult your network administrator DNS Server Settings You can configure the unit to use 2 DNS servers a primary DNS server and a secondary DNS server If you set both DNS servers the primary DNS server receives priority over the secondary DNS server If the primary DNS server returns no reply the secondary DNS server will be used For details about configuring the DNS server settings using the base unit and handsets or using the Web user interface see Configuring the Network Settings of the Unit in this section DNS Priority Using Configuration File The setting for DNS server s may be configured using the configuration files by your phone system dealer gt see DNS1_ADDR and DNS2_ADDR in 4 4 2 DNS Settings e If the DNS server addresses specified in the configuration file gt see DNS_PRIORITY in 4 4 2 DNS Settings are given priority the unit first sends its requests to those DNS servers If a match is not found the unit then sends its request to the DNS servers that were specified by the DHCP server or the primary secondary DNS servers that were
118. TPROXY_ADDR_8 Value Format String Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP outbound proxy server Value Range Max 127 characters IP address in dotted decimal notation or FQDN Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Outbound Proxy Server Address Page 85 SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT 1 SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_2 SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_8 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP outbound proxy server Value Range 1 65535 Default Value 5060 Web User Interface Reference Outbound Proxy Server Port Page 85 SIP_TRANSPORT_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example SIP_TRANSPORT_ 1 SIP_TRANSPORT_2 SIP_TRANSPORT_8 Value Format Integer Description Specifies which transport layer protocol to use for sending SIP packets Note Changing this setting may require restarting the unit Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 193 4 7 2 SIP Settings Value Range e 0 UDP e 1 TCP Note e All the parameters from SIP_TRANSPORT_1 to SIP_TRANSPORT_8 must have the same value Default Value 0 Web User Interface Reference Transport Protocol Page 82 SIP_ANM_DISPNAME_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example SIP_ANM DISPNAME_1 SIP_ANM DISPNAME 2 SIP_ANM
119. TTP Client Settings Global address Detection STUN Server Static NAPT Settings STUN Server Address Detection Interval 0 STUN Server Port 3478 1 65535 See Cones 3 4 4 1 Global Address Detection Detection Method Description Selects the method to use for detecting the global IP address Value Range e STUN e SIP Default Value STUN Detection Interval Description Specifies the interval in seconds to wait between attempts to detect the global IP address Value Range 0 10 65535 0 Disable Note e When Detection Method is set to SIP the value 0 disables detection and a value other than 0 enables detection Default Value 0 3 4 4 2 STUN Server STUN Server Address Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the STUN server 70 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 4 5 Static NAPT Settings Value Range Max 127 characters Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference STUN_SERV_ADDR Page 159 STUN Server Port Description Specifies the port number of the STUN server Value Range 1 65535 Default Value 3478 Configuration File Reference STUN_SERV_PORT Page 159 3 4 5 Static NAPT Settings This screen allows you to configure the NAPT Network Address Port Translation settings If the unit is connected behind a router that uses NAT NAPT to translate private IP addresses
120. Text Import Wizard Step 2 of 3 LS a This screen lets you set the delimiters your data contains You can see how your text is affected in the preview below Delimiters Semicolon Treat consecutive delimiters as one eg Text qualifier D Other Data preview 5 MacDowel a arbara Nicolls Gage 6 On the Text Import Wizard Step 3 of 3 window select all columns in Data preview select Text in Column data format and then click Finish The TSV file will be opened Text Import Wizard Step 3 of 3 zl This screen lets you select each column and set the Data Format Column data format General General converts numeric values to numbers date values to dates and all remaining values to text Date MOY DI Advanced Do not import column skip Data preview Note e Phone numbers must be treated as text strings Otherwise a 0 at the beginning of a phone number might disappear when exported 204 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 5 3 Dial Plan To save the phonebook data for importing to the unit 1 After editing the phonebook entries click Office Button and then Save As 2 Enter a file name in File name and select Unicode Text in Save as type The file will be saved in UTF 16 little endian with a BOM Fields will be separated by tabs 3 Click Save A message warning you about file compatibility will be displayed 4 Click Yes The file will be saved as a Unicode text f
121. The following settings will be reset to their factory defaults e DHCP setting restored to DHCP on e Settings related to static IP addressing the values for static IP address subnet mask default gateway DNS1 and DNS2 are cleared s DNS settings for DHCP connection cleared PHY settings speed and duplex mode of the either LAN or PC port are restored to automatic e VLAN Virtual Local Area Network settings disabled e Terminal number settings restored to automatic Notice After performing IP Reset the unit will restart automatically To avoid problems it is recommended that you save your settings before performing IP Reset Note e If these settings with the exception of PHY settings and terminal number settings were made through Web user interface programming the set values made through Web user interface programming remain effective even if you perform IP Reset To reset these settings to their factory defaults perform Reset Web Settings from the Web user interface again Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 31 1 2 2 Firmware Update e If these settings with the exception of PHY settings and terminal number settings were made through configuration file programming the set values made through configuration file programming remain effective even if you perform Reset Web Settings 1 2 1 2 Resetting the Settings Made through the Web User Interface Reset Web Settings Performing Reset We
122. Value 7 Phone User Interface Reference 2 1 3 VLAN Settings KX TGP550 only Page 35 Web User Interface Reference IP Phone Priority KX TGP550 only Page 67 VLAN_ID_PC KX TGP550 only Value Format Integer Description Specifies the VLAN ID for the PC Note e This setting is available only when NW_SETTING ENABLE is set to N Value Range 1 4094 Default Value 1 Phone User Interface Reference 2 1 3 VLAN Settings KX TGP550 only Page 35 Web User Interface Reference PC VLAN ID KX TGP550 only Page 67 VLAN_PRI_PC KX TGP550 only Value Format Integer Description Specifies the priority number for the PC Note e This setting is available only when NW_SETTING ENABLE is set to N Value Range 0 7 Default Value 7 Phone User Interface Reference 2 1 3 VLAN Settings KX TGP550 only Page 35 Web User Interface Reference PC Priority KX TGP550 only Page 67 4 4 4 HTTP Settings HTTP_VER 156 Value Format Integer Description Specifies which version of the HTTP protocol to use for HTTP communication Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 4 4 4 HTTP Settings Value Range 1 Use HTTP 1 0 0 Use HTTP 1 1 Note e For this unit it is strongly recommended that you specify 1 for this setting However if the HTTP server does not function well wi
123. Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 25 1 1 6 Provisioning To decrypt configuration files the unit uses the encryption key registered to it beforehand The unit determines the encryption status by checking the extension of the downloaded configuration file For details about encrypting configuration files contact the appropriate person in your organization Extension of Configuration Configuration File Parameters Used for Decrypting File etc CFG _FILE_KEY1 e2c CFG_FILE_KEY2 eich CFG _FILE_KEY3 eich Other than e1c e2c and Processed as unencrypted configuration files The extension cfg should be used for unencrypted configuration files Comparison of the 2 Methods The following table compares the characteristics for the 2 transfer methods Transferring Encrypted Configuration Files Transferring Configuration Files Using HTTPS Provisioning server load Light Heavy The server encrypts data for each transmission Operation load Necessary to encrypt data beforehand Unnecessary to encrypt data beforehand Management of configuration files Files must be decrypted and re encrypted for maintenance It is easy to manage files because they are not encrypted on the server Security of data on the server when operating High Low Configuration files are readable by anyone with access to the server Moreover there is
124. Week Page 80 DST_STOP_TIME Value Format Integer Description Specifies the end time of DST Summer Time in minutes after 12 00 AM Value Range 0 1439 Default Value 120 Web User Interface Reference Time Page 81 4 3 3 Syslog Settings SYSLOG_EVENT_SIP Value Format Integer Description Specifies which SIP related syslog events are sent to the syslog server Note e H the level of the event is higher than or equal to the set value the log is sent to the syslog server e This setting is not applicable for the current version No logs will be sent to the syslog server even if values 1 6 are specified Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 139 4 3 3 Syslog Settings Value Range 0 6 0 no logs sent 1 emergency highest 2 alert 3 critical 4 error 5 warning 6 information lowest Default Value 0 SYSLOG_EVENT_CFG Value Format Integer Value Range 0 6 Default Value 0 SYSLOG_EVENT_VOIP Value Format Integer Value Range 0 6 Default Value 0 SYSLOG_EVENT_TEL Value Format Integer 140 Description Specifies the threshold of syslog events regarding configuration Note e This setting is not applicable for the current version No logs will be sent to the syslog server even if values 1 6 are specified Description Specifies the threshold of syslo
125. Y Value Range 96 127 Default Value 101 Web User Interface Reference Telephone event Payload Type Page 95 RFC2543_HOLD ENABLE 1 8 Parameter Name Example RFC2543 HOLD ENABLE 1 RFC2543 HOLD ENABLE 2 RFC2543 HOLD ENABLE 8 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to enable the RFC 2543 Call Hold feature on this line 174 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 4 7 1 Call Control Settings Value Range e y Enable RFC 2543 Call Hold e N Disable RFC 2543 Call Hold Note e If set to Y the c 0 0 0 0 syntax will be set in SDP when sending a re INVITE message to hold the call e If set to N the c x x x x syntax will be set in SDP Default Value Y Web User Interface Reference Supports RFC 2543 c 0 0 0 0 Page 95 4 7 Line Settings 4 7 1 Call Control Settings VM_NUMBER 1 8 Parameter Name Example VM_NUMBER_1 VM_NUMBER_2 VM_NUMBER_8 Value Format String Description Specifies the phone number used to access the voice mail server Note e Your phone system must support voice mail Value Range Max 24 characters consisting of 0 9 and Note No other characters are allowed Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Voice Mail Access Number Page 105 DIAL_PLAN_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example DIAL PLAN _1
126. _ 1 8 Parameter Name Example SUB_RTX_INTVL_1 SUB_RTX_INTVL_2 SUB_RTX_INTVL_8 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the interval in seconds between transmissions of SUBSCRIBE requests when a subscription results in failure server no reply or error reply Value Range 10 86400 Default Value 10 REG_RTX_INTVL_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example REG RTX_INTVL_1 REG_RTX_INTVL_2 REG RTX_INTVL_8 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the interval in seconds between transmissions of the REGISTER request when a registration results in failure server no reply or error reply Value Range 10 86400 Default Value 10 SIP_P_PREFERRED_ID_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example SIP_P_PREFERRED_ID 1 SIP_P PREFERRED ID 2 SIP_P_PREFERRED_ID_8 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to add the P Preferred Identity header to SIP messages Value Range e Y Add the P Preferred Identity header s N Do not add the P Preferred Identity header Default Value N Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 191 4 7 2 SIP Settings SIP_PRIVACY_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example SIP_PRIVACY_1 SIP_PRIVACY_2 SIP_PRIVACY_8 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to add the Privacy header to SIP messages Value Range e y Add the
127. _1 N SIP_FOVR_MAX 1 2 SIP_DNSSRV ENA_ 1 N SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_1 _sip udp SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_1 _sip tcp SIP_100REL_ENABLE_1 N SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_1 0 SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_1 presenceserver example com SIP_PRSNC_PORT_1 5060 SIP_2NDPRSNC_ADDR_1 SIP_2NDPRSNC_PORT_1 5060 USE_DEL_REG OPEN_1 N USE_DEL_REG CLOSE_1 N PORT_PUNCH_INTVL_1 0 SIP_SUBS_EXPIRE_1 3600 SUB_RTX_INTVL_1 10 REG RTX_INTVL_1 10 SIP_P_ PREFERRED _ID_1 N SIP_PRIVACY_1 N ADD_USER_PHONE_1 N SDP_USER_ID_1 SUB_INTERVAL_RATE_1 90 SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_1 SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_1 5060 SIP_TRANSPORT_1 0 SIP_ANM DISPNAME_1 1 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 229 8 2 Comprehensive Example of the Configuration File 230 SIE ANN USERNAME 1 0 SIP_ANM HOSTNAME 1 N SIP_DETECT_SSAF_1 N PHONE_NUMBER_1 1234567890 DISPLAY NAME 1 1234567890 INTERNATIONAL ACCESS_CODE ait aa a cc cc E Settings for line 2 SaaS Ra SSSR EEN HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH HH System Settings DAEAR EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE Syslog Settings SYSLOG _RTPSMLY_INTVL_2 20 DAEAR EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE VoIP Settings DAEAR EEEE EEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE Codec Settings SDP_CODECO_2 G722 SDP_CODEC1_2 PCMA SDP_CODEC2_2 G726 32 SDP_CODEC3_2 G729A S
128. a configuration file more than once the value specified first is applied All configurable settings can be specified in the configuration file You can ignore settings that already have the desired values Only change parameters as necessary Note e For examples of configuration files see Section 8 Configuration File Examples 4 2 2 Configuration File Parameters The information on each parameter that can be written in a configuration file is shown in the tables below The information includes parameter name as the title of the table value format description permitted value range default value of each parameter phone user interface reference and Web user interface reference Parameter Name This is the system predefined parameter name and cannot be changed Value Format Each parameter value is categorized into Integer Boolean or String Some parameters require a composite form such as Comma separated Integer or Comma separated String Integer a numerical value described as a sequence of numerical characters optionally preceded by a minus An empty string is not allowed Boolean Y or N String sequence of alphanumerical characters For details about available characters see 4 2 3 Characters Available for String Values Comma separated Integer a list of integers separated by commas No space characters are allowed Comma separated String a list of strings separated by commas Document Version 2010 03 15
129. account the language will be changed after the message Complete is displayed If you are logged in with the Administrator account the language will be changed when a user logs in to the Web user interface as User The language used for the Web user interface for the Administrator account is always English e The language used for the handsets or the base unit KX TGP550 only remains unchanged even if the language for the Web user interface is changed Panasonic KX TGP550T04 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance Web Language Web Port Close System Web Language Language English US Administrator Password crane user Password Save Cancel Time Adjust Settings 3 5 1 1 Web Language Language Description Selects the language used for the Web user interface when logged in with the User account Value Range e English US e English UK Note e The available languages may differ depending on the country area of use Default Value English US English UK Note e The default is one of these depending on the country area of use Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 73 3 5 2 Administrator Password 3 5 2 Administrator Password This screen allows you to change the password used to authenticate the Administrator account when logging in to the Web user interface Note e Forsecurity reasons the characters entered for t
130. age 174 3 6 4 5 Call Hold Supports RFC 2543 c 0 0 0 0 Description Selects whether to enable the RFC 2543 Call Hold feature on this line Value Range e Yes es No Note e Ifyou select Yes the c 0 0 0 0 syntax will be set in SDP when sending a re INVITE message to hold the call If you select No the c x x x x syntax will be set in SDP Default Value Yes Configuration File Reference RFC2543_HOLD_ENABLE 1 8 Page 174 3 6 4 6 CODEC Settings First CODEC Description Selects which codec to assign the highest priority to Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 95 3 6 4 VoIP Settings Line 1 Line 8 Value Range e 6722 PCMA G 711 A law G726 32 G 726 32k G729A PCMU G 711 u law Note You can select each codec on once within CODEC Settings A maximum of 5 priorities can be assigned If only 4 codecs are specified in a configuration file you will be able to select from only 4 codecs and Fifth CODEC will be disabled The codec selections that are displayed may vary depending on the unit or the operating environment Default Value G722 Configuration File Reference SDP_CODEC 0 4 _ 1 8 Page 167 Second CODEC Description Selects the codec to assign the second highest priority to Value Range 6722 PCMA G 711 A law G726 32 G 726 32k G729A PCMU
131. ains effective Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference DIAL_PLAN_ 1 8 Page 175 106 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 7 3 Call Control Line 1 Line 8 Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match Description Selects whether to make a call even if the dialed number does not match any of the dial formats specified in Dial Plan Value Range e Yes e No Note e Ifyou select Yes calls will be made even if the dialed number does not match the dial formats specified in Dial Plan i e dial plan filtering is disabled If you select No calls will not be made if the dialed number does not match one of the dial formats specified in Dial Plan i e dial plan filtering is enabled Default Value Yes Configuration File Reference DIAL PLAN NOT MATCH ENARBLE 1 8 Page 176 3 7 3 3 Call Features Block Caller ID Description Selects whether to make calls without transmitting the phone number to the called party Note e Availability depends on your phone system Value Range e Yes e No Default Value No Block Anonymous Call Description Selects whether to reject incoming calls that do not show the caller s number Value Range e Yes e No Default Value No Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 107 3 7 3 Call Control Line 1 Line 8 Do Not Disturb 3 7 3 4 Call Forward D
132. al keys to enter the priority value 0 7 7 highest priority SAVE Base unit EXIT Handset OFF In cases when buttons soft key icons are shown in symbols pictures 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Base unit middle soft key gt 5 3 0 Handset center of joystick gt 5 3 0 V a Select VLAN setting gt RIA Y 4 Select IP Phone or Pc gt X Y 4 Select VLAN ID gt fg Use the dial keys to enter the VLAN ID 14094 OK V a Select Priority gt ld Use the dial keys to enter the priority value 0 7 7 highest priority 10 Base unit C gt Handset A Note e After you have finished configuring the settings the base unit will restart automatically once the base unit or handset returns to idle 2 1 4 IP Reset 36 IP Reset returns the basic network settings to their factory defaults You can perform this operation from the base unit or one of the handsets The following settings will be reset to their factory defaults DHCP setting restored to DHCP on Settings related to static IP addressing the values for static IP address subnet mask default gateway DNS1 and DNS2 are cleared DNS settings for DHCP connection cleared Administrator Guide Document Version 2 1 5 Terminal Number Settings e PHY settings speed and duplex mode of the either LAN or PC port are restored to automatic e VLAN settings disabled Termina
133. another method configuration files are not encrypted while stored on the server and then using the encryption key registered to the unit beforehand they are encrypted when they are transferred This method is particularly useful when several units are configured to download a common configuration file using different encryption keys However as when downloading an unencrypted configuration file using HTTPS the server will be heavily burdened when transferring configuration files 26 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 1 1 7 Web User Interface Programming 1 1 7 Web User Interface Programming After connecting the unit to your network you can configure the unit s settings by accessing the Web user interface from a PC connected to the same network For details see Section 3 Web User Interface Programming KX TGP550 1 1 7 1 Password for Web User Interface Programming To program the unit via the Web user interface a login account is required There are 2 types of accounts and each has different access privileges e User User accounts are for use by end users Users can change the settings that are specific to the unit e Administrator Administrator accounts are for use by administrators to manage the system configuration Administrators can change all the settings including the network settings in addition to the settings that can be changed from a User account A separate password is assigned to each accou
134. ar server proxy server SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_1 registrar example com SIP_PRXY_ADDR_1 proxy example com IP Address or FQDN of SIP presence server SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_1 presenceserver example com Enables DNS SRV lookup SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_1 Y ID password for SIP authentication SIP_AUTHID_1 SIP_User SIP_PASS_1 SIP_Password Some Timer Settings Expiration time of SIP registration 1 hour REG EXPIRE _TIME_1 3600 Disables SIP Session Timer RFC 4028 SIP_SESSION_TIME_1 0 SIP phone number PHONE_NUMBER_1 1234567890 Caller ID passed to opposite party DISPLAY NAME 1 1234567890 HEHE HE HE HE FE HE HE HE HE FE FE FE HE HE HE FE FE FE HE HE E HE FE FE FE HE HE FE FE FE FE HE E HE FE FE FE HE HE HE HE FE FE FE HE RRE HE FE HE FH HH HH HE VoIP Setting HEHE HE HE HE FE HE HE HE HE FE FE FE HE HE HE FE FE FE HE HE HE FE FE FE FE HE HE FE FE FE FE HE E HE FE FE FE HE HE HE HE FE FE FE HE E HE FE FE FE HE HE HE FE FE FH HH HH HE DTMF will be sent through SDP according to RFC 2833 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 8 2 Comprehensive Example of the Configuration File OUTBANDDTIMF 1 Y DAREA EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEE EEEE HH HH HH HH HH HH HH Call Control Settings DAAE E EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EEE EEEE EEEE EEEE Enables subscription to the Voice Mail server VM_SUBSCRIBE_ENABLE Y Shared Call Settings SHARED CALL ENABLE Les SHA
135. art Day and Time of DST Start Day and Time of Summer Time 79 Start Time 115 Static IP Address 63 Static NAPT Settings 30 71 Static Settings 63 STATIC_GATEWAY 152 STATIC_IP_ADDRESS 151 STATIC_SUBNET 152 Statistical Information 93 Status 40 Status Tab 40 56 STT_TONE_FRQ 164 STT_TONE_TIMING 164 STUN Server 31 70 159 STUN Server Address 70 STUN Server Port 71 STUN Settings 128 159 STUN_2NDSERV_ADDR 159 STUN_2NDSERV_PORT 160 STUN_SERV_ADDR 159 STUN_SERV_PORT 159 Stutter Tone 114 SUB_INTERVAL_RATE_ 1 8 192 SUB_RTX_INTVL_ 1 8 191 Subnet Mask 59 64 Supports 100rel RFC 3262 89 Supports RFC 2543 c 0 0 0 0 95 Supports Session Timer RFC 4028 90 Synchronization 77 Synchronization Interval 77 SYNCHRONIZATION_ENABLE_ 1 8 177 Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward 106 Syslog Settings 126 139 222 SYSLOG_ADDR 141 SYSLOG_EVENT_CFG 140 SYSLOG_EVENT_SIP 139 SYSLOG_EVENT_TEL 140 SYSLOG_EVENT_VOIP 140 SYSLOG_PORT 141 SYSLOG_RTPSMLY_INTVL_ 1 8 141 System 42 System Settings 126 134 Administrator Guide 247 Index System Tab 42 73 System Time Settings 126 136 T T1 Timer 87 T2 Timer 88 Tab separated Value TSV 116 117 201 203 TCP IP Settings 14 TCP IP Settings DHCP or Static IP Address Assignment 14 Technical Support 2 Telephone 45 Telephone Settings 128 161 Telephone Tab 45 98 Telephone event Payload Type 95 TELEVENT_PTYPE_ 1 8 174 Terminal No 37 Terminal Numbe
136. asonic KX TGP550T04 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance Export Phonebook Telephone Export Phonebook Multi Number Settings Handset or Base Unit Handset 1 Call Control Line 1 Export BE Line 3 Line 4 Line 5 Line 6 Line7 Line 8 Export Phonebook 3 7 6 1 Export Phonebook Handset or Base Unit Description Selects the handset or base unit to export the phonebook data from Value Range e Handset 1 e Handset 2 e Handset 3 e Handset A e Handset 5 e Handset 6 e Base Unit KX TGP550 only Default Value Handset 1 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 117 3 8 1 Firmware Maintenance 3 8 Maintenance This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the Maintenance tab 3 8 1 Firmware Maintenance This screen allows you to perform firmware updates automatically or manually Panasonic KX TGP550T04 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance Firmware Maintenance Web Port Close Enable Firmware Update Yes No Local Firmware Update Update Type Sano Onn Firmware File URL Save Cancel 3 8 1 1 Firmware Maintenance Enable Firmware Update Description Selects whether to perform firmware updates when the unit detects a newer version of firmware Note Changing this setting may require restarting the unit e Local firmware updates from the Web user interface gt
137. ately from that of the base unit and handsets The available languages may differ depending on the country area of use Note e To select the display language for the base unit or handsets refer to the User Guide on the Panasonic Web site gt see Introduction e To select the display language for the Web user interface see 3 5 1 Web Language 1 1 3 Basic Network Setup This section describes the basic network settings that you must configure before you can use the unit on your network You must configure the following network settings e TCP IP settings DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol or static IP address assignment e DNS server settings TCP IP Settings DHCP or Static IP Address Assignment 14 A unique IP address must be assigned to the unit so that it can communicate on the network How you assign an IP address depends on your network environment This unit supports the following 2 methods for assigning an IP address Obtaining an IP Address Automatically from a DHCP Server You can configure the unit to automatically obtain its IP address when it starts up from a DHCP server running on your network With this method the system can efficiently manage a limited number of IP addresses Note that the IP address assigned to the unit may vary every time the unit is started up For details about the DHCP server consult your network administrator Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 1 1 3 Basic Network
138. ation File Reference SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_ 1 8 Page 187 SRV lookup Prefix for TCP Description Specifies a prefix to add to the domain name when performing a DNS SRV lookup using TCP Note e This setting is available only when Enable DNS SRV lookup is set to Yes Value Range Max 32 characters Default Value _sip _tcp Configuration File Reference SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_ 1 8 Page 187 3 6 2 8 Timer Settings T1 Timer Description Selects the default interval in milliseconds between transmissions of SIP messages For details refer to RFC 3261 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 87 3 6 2 SIP Settings Line 1 Line 8 T2 Timer Description Selects the maximum interval in seconds between transmissions of SIP messages For details refer to RFC 3261 Value Range e 2 e 4 e 8 e 16 32 Default Value 4 Value Range e 250 e 500 e 1000 e 2000 e 4000 Default Value 500 Configuration File Reference SIP_TIMER_T1_ 1 8 Page 184 Configuration File Reference SIP_TIMER_T2_ 1 8 Page 185 INVITE Retry Count Description Selects the number of times that INVITE requests are retransmitted when no reply is received from the server Value Range 1 6 Default Value 6 Configuration File Reference INVITE_RTXN_ 1 8 Page 185 Non INVITE Retry Count
139. b Settings from the Web user interface gt see 3 8 4 Reset to Defaults resets the settings made through the Web user interface to their default values When you use this feature the unit will return to the status just after performing the most recent provisioning or pre provisioning Notice e After performing Reset Web Settings the base unit will restart automatically To avoid problems it is recommended that you save your settings before performing Reset Web Settings Note The settings configured through the phone user interface only will not be reset However settings that can be configured through both the phone user interface and Web user interface will be reset 1 2 2 Firmware Update 32 You can update the unit s firmware to improve the unit s operation You can configure the unit so that it automatically downloads the new firmware file from a specified location The firmware update will be executed when the unit is restarted For details see Section 6 Firmware Update Provisioning server Firmware server Configuration file 2 Download Check for update Firmware download and update Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 Section 2 Phone User Interface Programming This section explains how to configure the unit by entering direct commands through the phone user interface Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 33 2 1 2 Speed Duplex Settings 2 1 Phone User
140. c KX TGP550T04 Status Network System VolP Telephone Maintenance Reset to Defaults Maintenance The Web data for this unit will be reset to its default values when you click Reset Wel Selina Provisioning Maintenance Reset to Defautts l Restart 3 8 5 Restart This screen allows you to restart the base unit by clicking Restart After you click this button a dialog box is displayed asking whether you want to restart the base unit Click OK to perform a restart or Cancel not to Notice The base unit will restart even if it is being accessed through the phone user interface or on calls Panasonic KX TGP550T04 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance Restart Web Port Close Maintenance Click Restart to restart this unit Restarting will take a few moments Local Firmware Update Provisioning Maintenance Reset to Defaults Restart Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 123 3 8 5 Restart 124 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 Section 4 Configuration File Programming This section provides information about the configuration parameters used in the configuration files Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 125 4 1 Configuration File Parameter List 4 1 Configuration File Parameter List The following tables show all the parameters that can be programmed using configuration file programming For details about each parameter see the reference page
141. ch as 8080 enter the URL for accessing the Web user interface using the following format http 192 168 0 100 8080 192 168 0 100 IP address of the unit Port Close Timer Description Specifies the length of time in minutes to keep the Web port open when there has been no communication between the unit and the PC If the specified length of time elapses without any communication the Web port closes automatically Communication is detected when you click a tab menu item the Save button or by reloading the application or pressing the F5 key Value Range 1 1440 Default Value 30 76 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 5 5 Time Adjust Settings 3 5 5 Time Adjust Settings This screen allows you to enable automatic clock adjustment using an NTP server and configure the settings for DST Daylight Saving Time also known as Summer Time Panasonic KX TGP550T04 Status Network System VolP Telephone Maintenance Time Adjust Settings System Synchronization LT Slate Synchronization by Yes ONo Synchronization Interval 43200 seconds 10 86400 Ss Time Adjust settings NTP Server Address Time Zone GMT v Daylight Saving Time Enable DST O Yes No DST Offset 60 minute s 0 720 Start Day and Time of DST Month March X Day of Week Second Sunday X Time 120 minute s 0 1439 End Day and Time of DST Month October Day of Week Second Sunday X Time 120 minute s 0
142. cifies whether to perform firmware updates when the unit detects a newer version of firmware Note Changing this setting may require restarting the unit e Local firmware updates from the Web user interface gt see 3 8 2 Local Firmware Update can be performed regardless of this setting Value Range Y Enable firmware updates e N Disable firmware updates Default Value Y Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 141 4 3 4 Firmware Update Settings Web User Interface Reference Enable Firmware Update Page 118 FIRM_VER_EUDECT Value Format String Description Specifies the firmware version of the DECT system Note e DECT is a widely used cordless phone system in Europe Changing this setting may require restarting the unit Value Range Max 5 characters nn nn n 0 9 Default Value 00 00 FIRM_VER_USDECT Value Format String Description Specifies the firmware version ofthe DECT 6 0 system Note e DECT 6 0 is a widely used cordless phone system in North America e Changing this setting may require restarting the unit Value Range Max 5 characters nn nn n 0 9 Default Value 00 00 FIRM_UPGRADE_AUTO Value Format Boolean 142 Description Specifies whether to display a confirmation message asking the user to perform a firmware update manual or perform the firmware update
143. conditional Enable Call Forward Page 108 Phone Number Page 109 Busy 7 Enable Call Forward v v Page 109 Phone Number v v Page 110 No Answer _ Enable Call Forward v v Page 110 Phone Number v v Page 111 Ring Count v v Page 111 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 1 Web User Interface Setting List Access Menu Item Section Title Setting Level Ref U Tone Settings Dial Tone Tone Frequencies v Page 112 Tone Timings v Page 112 Busy Tone Tone Frequencies v Page 113 Tone Timings v Page 113 Ringing Tone Tone Frequencies v Page 113 Tone Timings v Page 114 Stutter Tone Tone Frequencies v Page 114 Tone Timings v Page 114 Reorder Tone Tone Frequencies v Page 114 Tone Timings v Page 115 Howler Tone Tone Frequencies v Page 115 Tone Timings v Page 115 Start Time v Page 115 Import Import Phonebook Handset or Base Unit v Page 116 Fb File Name v Page 116 Export Export Phonebook Handset or Base Unit v Page 117 Phonebook 1 The access levels are abbreviated as follows U User A Administrator A check mark indicates that the setting is available for that access level 2 This setting can also be configured through configuration file programming Maintenance Access Menu Item Section Title Setting Lever Ref U Firmware Firmware Maintenance Enable Firmware Update v Page 118
144. d Duplex LAN Port v Page 65 Settings Mode PC Port p Page 66 VLAN Settings Enable VLAN v Page 66 IP Phone VLAN ID Page 66 Priority Page 67 PC VLAN ID v Page 67 Priority v Page 67 HTTP Client HTTP Client Settings HTTP Version v Page 68 sed HTTP User Agent v Page 68 Proxy Server Settings Enable Proxy v Page 69 Proxy Server Address v Page 69 Proxy Server Port v Page 69 Global Address Global Address Detection Method v Page 70 in Ren Detection Interval v Page 70 STUN Server STUN Server Address v Page 70 STUN Server Port v Page 71 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 41 3 1 Web User Interface Setting List Access 1 Menu Item Section Title Setting Lavel Ref U A Static NAPT Global IP Address Global IP Address v Page 72 tti SST Enable Global IP Line 1 Line 8 v Page 72 Address Usage per Line External RTP Port Channel 1 3 v Page 72 The access levels are abbreviated as follows U User A Administrator A check mark indicates that the setting is available for that access level This setting can also be configured through other programming methods phone user interface programming or configuration file programming If your phone system dealer does not allow you these settings you cannot change them even though the unit shows the setting menu Contact your phone system dealer for further information This setting can al
145. de Document Version 2010 03 15 Tone Timings 3 7 5 Import Phonebook Description Specifies the pattern in milliseconds of reorder tones using 8 whole numbers on 1 off 1 on 2 off 2 on 3 off 3 on 4 off 4 separated by commas Value Range 0 5000 0 Infinite time Default Value 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 Configuration File Reference REORDER_TONE_TIMING Page 165 3 7 4 6 Howler Tone Tone Frequencies Description Specifies the dual tone frequencies in hertz of howler tones i e alarm tones using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma Value Range 0 200 3000 0 No tone Default Value 1400 2060 Configuration File Reference HOWLER_TONE_FRQ Page 165 Tone Timings Description Specifies the pattern in milliseconds of howler tones i e alarm tones using 4 whole numbers on 1 off 1 on 2 off 2 separated by commas Value Range 0 5000 0 Infinite time Default Value 100 100 100 100 Configuration File Reference HOWLER_TONE_TIMING Page 165 Start Time Description Specifies the length of time in seconds that busy or reorder tones play until they switch to howler tones Value Range 0 120 0 Disable Default Value 30 Configuration File Reference HOWLER_START_TIME Page 166 3 7 5 Import Phonebook This screen allows you to import phonebook data
146. deesseessuseetanees 111 No Answer Ring Count EE 111 3 7 4 TONS SNS siise neiaie a Eege eg 112 3 7 4 1 Bial Ke 112 Tone Freouences 112 Tone Re lt 112 3 7 4 2 Busy Ken EEN 113 Tone Frequencies cccccscccseeeseeeseeseessseesseeeseseceeceeeecseeeesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeseaaes 113 Tone HIMINS E 113 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 7 Table of Contents 8 3 7 4 3 PRIMM WO EE 113 Tone Frequencies cccccceccseesseesseseseessesssssseeseseeceeeceseeeeeeecseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseneseaeenaaes 113 Tone TIMINI eege EE EE EEN 114 3 7 4 4 LUMEN Toner eene a e beet Cette ee tetas 114 Tone Frequencies ccccccecceeeeseeeeessssesseessessseseceeceeeceseceeeceeseceeeceeeeeeseeeeseneseaeenaaes 114 Tone MMINGS essen EE eens 114 3 7 4 5 Reorder TONG nn nnnnnnnnnnennnnennnnnnnnnneenene sn iaaa ERa Naaa 114 Tone Frequencies cccccceccseeeseeeseesssessesssessseseseeceeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesenessaneneas 114 Tone be ET 115 3 7 4 6 Howler Re 115 Tone Frequencies uuuunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 115 Tone IMINO 2 een ee 115 Start Hin 115 3 7 5 Import Phonebook 115 3 7 5 1 Import Phonebook nenn nsnnnnnnn nn 116 Handset or Base Unit zn ae ee 116 SICH LEE 116 3 7 6 Export Phonebook cased iscesscbuaus hobs vais ini ui 117 3 7 6 1 Export Phonebook Cee 117 Handset COR Bits NIN EE 117 3 8 Ma inten ane ii ciesicocecsce cec
147. e 1424 49150 even number only Note The value for this setting must be greater than or equal to STE PORT MIN 400 Default Value 20000 Web User Interface Reference Maximum RTP Port Number Page 92 RTP_PTIME Value Format Integer Description Specifies the interval in milliseconds between transmissions of RTP packets Value Range 20 30 40 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 173 4 6 3 Miscellaneous VoIP Settings Default Value 20 Web User Interface Reference RTP Packet Time Page 91 4 6 3 Miscellaneous VoIP Settings OUTBANDDTMF_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example OUTBANDDTMF 1 OUTBANDDTMF 2 OUTBANDDTMF_8 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies the method for transmitting DTMF tones Value Range e y Outband use telephone event N Inband Note If set to Y DTMF tones will be sent through SDP compliant with RFC 2833 If setto N DTMF tones will be encoded in the RTP stream Default Value Y Web User Interface Reference DTMF Type Page 94 TELEVENT_PTYPE_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example TELEVENT_PTYPE_ 1 TELEVENT_PTYPE_2 TELEVENT PTYPE_8 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the RFC 2833 payload type for DTMF tones Note e This setting is available only when OUTBANDDTMF_ 1 8 is set to
148. e NOM_DELAY_1 NOM DELAY 2 NOM DELAY 8 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the initial delay in 10 millisecond units of the jitter buffer Value Range 1 7 x 10 ms Note e This setting is subject to the following conditions This value must be greater than or equal to MIN_DELAY This value must be less than MAX_DELAY Default Value 2 Web User Interface Reference Initial Delay Page 94 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 RTP_PORT_MIN 4 6 2 RTP Settings Value Format Integer Description Specifies the lowest port number that the unit will use for RTP packets Note If port numbers are specified in Channel 1 3 in 3 4 5 3 External RTP Port in the Web user interface this setting is ignored and the corresponding external RTP port is enabled Value Range 1024 48750 even number only Note e The value for this setting must be less than or equal to RTP_PORT_MAX 400 Default Value 16000 Web User Interface Reference Minimum RTP Port Number Page 91 RTP_PORT_MAX Value Format Integer Description Specifies the highest port number that the unit will use for RTP packets Note If port numbers are specified in Channel 1 3 in 3 4 5 3 External RTP Port in the Web user interface this setting is ignored and the corresponding external RTP port is enabled Value Rang
149. e e The URL specified by your phone system dealer may be preset in the unit Configuration File Reference CFG_PRODUCT_FILE_PATH Page 145 Master File URL Description Specifies the URL of the master configuration file which is used when all units need the same settings Note s When you change this setting set Enable Provisioning to Yes at the same time Value Range Max 255 characters Default Value Not stored Note s The URL specified by your phone system dealer may be preset in the unit Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 121 3 8 4 Reset to Defaults Configuration File Reference CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH Page 146 Cyclic Auto Resync Description Selects whether the unit periodically checks for updates of configuration files Value Range e Yes es No Default Value No Configuration File Reference CFG_CYCLIC Page 148 Resync Interval Description Specifies the interval in minutes between periodic checks for updates of the configuration files Value Range 1 40320 Default Value 10080 Configuration File Reference CFG_CYCLIC_INTVL Page 149 Header Value for Resync Event Description Specifies the value of the Event header sent from the SIP server to the unit so that the unit can access the configuration files on the provisioning server Value Range Max
150. e EELEE 170 SEN NSS EE 170 PU IN ER Ki gt INSPRANRANEEDE SEE ERILDEEPIUETPIENLERNELFEREERENERUERTERREEENLIEREIEDSEDEEBEPIRLNVIRLERALEPBRIRLFR 171 MAX DELAY IB ee ee ee 171 MIN DELAY TO EEN 172 NOM DELAY NEE 172 RIP PORT MIN E 173 Ee Kee EE 173 Ee eebe EEN 173 4 6 3 Miscellaneous VolP Settings E 174 OUTBANDD IMF 158 20222 niana aaka een 174 FELEVENIT PIYRE ABless 2232er 174 RFC2543_HOLD_ENABLE_ 1 8 EE 174 4 7 Line Settings anne hehe 175 4 7 1 MUON Eine D 175 VM NUMBER Eege Ee EEN 175 DIAL PLANIPI E 175 DIAL_PLAN_NOT_MATCH_ENABLE_ 1 8 cece cece ENEE 176 SHARED GALL ENABLE IB E 176 SHARED USERID il ere creer ee ee ee er ee 177 SYNCHRONIZATION ENABLE 1 8 nun 177 PRIVACY MODELLE EE 177 4 7 2 EE eet 178 SIP USER AGENT ee EE EE e 178 SE IP RE E 178 SIP PASSAT E 179 NEE 179 SIP PRXY ADDR lege ee 179 SIP PRAY PORI NET RE 180 SIP RGSTR ADDR 158 E 180 SIP RGS UR PORT 158 E 180 SIP SVCDOMAIN FIT EE 180 REG EXPIRE TIME TR een eine 181 REG INTERVAL ARATE 158 sun 181 SIP SESSION TIMESTI ST 4 2222 ee el een 181 TOS SP E EE 181 SIP_2NDPROXY_ADDR_ 148 ice 2322 Ran aan 183 SIP 2NDPROXY PORT FB see ee a 184 SIP_2ZNDRGSTR_ ADDR Hl u een 184 SIE 2ZNERGSTR PORT 1 8 use EE 184 SIP UMER TIER ange nee ea see 184 SIP TIMER T2 HB 185 INVITE CAE An NN WE 185 SSC AE WE EE 185 POW ORS E 186 las E TB EE 186 SIP BRISSRY ENAT FB 2 22 2 2 ee ege 186 SIP UDP SRV e
151. e Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1992 Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1992 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1993 Adam Glass Copyright C 1993 by Sun Microsystems Inc All rights reserved Copyright c 1994 Gordon W Ross Copyright c 1994 Winning Strategies Inc All rights reserved Copyright c 1995 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright C 1995 1996 1997 and 1998 WIDE Project All rights reserved Copyright c 1996 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1996 John S Dyson All rights reserved Copyright c 1996 Matt Thomas All rights reserved Copyright c 1996 Matthew R Green All rights reserved Copyright c 1996 Paul Kranenburg Copyright c 1996 1997 1999 2001 The NetBSD Foundation Inc All rights reserved Copyright c 1996 2000 Christopher G Demetriou All rights reserved Copyright c 1996 1999 by Internet Software Consortium Copyright c 1996 1999 by Internet Software Consortium Copyright c 1997 Jonathan Stone and Jason R Thorpe All rights reserved Copyright c 1997 Christos Zoulas All rights reserved Copyright c 1997 Man
152. e cesserendssnevadeeiasesvectvvveteceevenatbcecsecacnsdedvarsdsseetveeevaeeteasccscetseeedenests 118 3 8 1 Firmware Maintenance snnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 118 3 8 1 1 Firmware Maintenance eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeaaeeaaaeaaaaaasaaeeeeeeeseeeeenes 118 Enable Firmware Update nenn 118 Update Type ne nnnnnnnnnnnnnnennennnnennnnnnnnnnnnnennennnn nen 118 Firmware File URL 119 3 8 2 Local Firmware Update nenne nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennene nenn 119 3 8 2 1 Local Firmware Update nn nnnnnn nn 119 ee dl RE 119 FEN AE 120 3 8 3 Provisioning IMIAINMGN TE 120 3 8 3 1 Provisioning Maintenance un ee 120 Enable ProvVISIOnINg vest seb el deeg ee ee een eebe 120 Standard File URL 121 Product File URL 121 Master File URL 121 RE 122 PRS VG EE 122 Header Value for Resync Event 0 c cccctcescctesenseeeeeeessesesasssesesensentnenteteeesees 122 3 8 4 Reset to Defaults erei mereerin e a a e ee aae a r E Er 122 3 8 5 EE 123 4 Configuration File Programming ccc sssceeeeeeseeseseeeeeeeeeeseeeneeeeees 125 4 1 Configuration File Parameter List uuususnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnn 126 4 2 General Information on the Configuration Files urrrsrsusssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn 132 4 2 1 Configuration File Specifications 2 u u0rn nenn sneneennnsnsnnnandnan naar
153. e eeeeeeeeeteneneaaee 102 Conference ele 102 e TT GEPBA PER PEPANEER SER ER LEBEN EPNBERERTEDERBEEFINERENNEDELLENPLCEBEONEFELILEPETEUELDELEHBECFANEER 102 3 7 2 2 Emergency Call Phone Number essen Eege dE SES 103 EE 103 3 7 2 3 Call Rejection Phone Numbers c ccccccccccccccneteseessscsesessecceseececensereesestensniecnnesestensdesecees 103 E WEE 103 3 7 3 Call Control Line 1 Line 8 onen een nnnennnnennnnnnn 104 3 7 3 1 Cal e EE 104 Display TEE 104 Enable e AREANEPERAEEBERBEDENBEELINEERTSLVEABERRERELFIELELUSERPNGERPEERUEFBEFEITERENBERFRLEGERBERFTRLER 104 Voice Mail Access Number see en 105 Enable Shared RRE 105 Unique ID of Shared Cal 106 Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward cccsssseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennaea 106 3 7 3 2 Dial Plani EE 106 IR EE 106 Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match ccccccecscceeeeneeeneee nn nn En nn anna 107 3 7 3 3 Call AUS enee eebe eenegen 107 Block Galler EE 107 Block e e ie 107 Do Not DIStUrD EE 108 3 7 3 4 Call F rward EE 108 Unconditional Enable Call Forward sense 108 Unconditional Phone Number 2 uu u 2 109 Busy Enable Call Forward EE 109 Busy Phone NUMDET sdectacasatsethesnssecshdacehacnbdasetoasnteiSeveaniantdccctdcccetoctuecstutesadantwensths 110 No Answer Enable Call Forward c ssccsnseeceeeeeeeessneneneeseaenesesseenenseeees 110 No Answer Phone Number 0 cc c0cccnececsnesseseecetensceeneneeeessaennente
154. e following configuration files in the Panasonic directory Contains the common settings for the 2 units ConfigCommon cfg Contains the settings unique to each unit Config0080F0111111 cfg Config0080F0222222 cfg To set up the provisioning server 1 Connect the units to the network and turn them on a The unit with the MAC address 0080F0111111 accesses the following URLs http prov example com Panasonic ConfigCommon cfg Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 1 1 6 Provisioning http prov example com Panasonic ConfigO080F01 11111 cfg b The unit with the MAC address 0080F0222222 accesses the following URLs http prov example com Panasonic ConfigCommon cfg http prov example com Panasonic ConfigO080F0222222 cfg Example Provisioning Direction from the Server The following figure shows an example NOTIFY message from the server directing the units to perform provisioning The text check sync is specified for CFG _RESYNC_FROM_ SIP NOTIFY sip 1234567890 sip example com SIP 2 0 Via SIP 2 0 UDP xxx xxx xxx xxx 5060 branch abcdef ghijkl From sip prov sip example com To sip 1234567890 sip example com Date Thu 1 Jan 2009 01 01 01 GMT Call ID 123456 1234567912345678 CSeq 1 NOTIFY Contact sip xxx xxx xxx xxx 5060 Event check sync Content Length 0 1 1 6 6 Encryption Secure Provisioning Methods In order to perform provisioning securely there are 2 methods for t
155. e shown in English alphabet 1 Base unit MENU middle soft key 5 0 1 Handset MENU center of joystick gt 5 0 1 2 Base unit EXIT Handset OFF In cases when buttons soft key icons are shown in symbols pictures 1 Base unit middle soft key 5 0 1 Handset center of joystick 5 0 1 2 Base unit G Handset A 2 For authentication enter your ID username and password and then click OK Notice The default ID for the User account is user and the default password is blank The ID cannot be changed from the Web user interface but it can be changed through configuration file programming When you log in as User to the Web user interface for the first time the Change User Password screen see 3 5 3 Change User Password will be displayed Enter a new password and then perform authentication again with the new password to log in to the Web user interface The default ID for the Administrator account is admin and the default password is adminpass The ID cannot be changed from the Web user interface but it can be changed through configuration file programming 3 The Web user interface window is displayed Configure the settings for the unit as desired 4 You can log out from the Web user interface at any time by clicking Web Port Close Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 51 3 2 2 Accessing the Web User Interface Controls on the Wind
156. ecessary secondary DNS server s manually The permissible values are Max 15 characters n n n n n 0 255 except 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 127 0 0 1 etc Default Value Receive DNS server address automatically Phone User Interface Reference Configuring Settings from the Base Unit KX TGP550 only Handset Page 15 Configuration File Reference DHCP_DNS_ENABLE Page 151 3 4 1 3 Static Settings Static IP Address Description Specifies the IP address for the unit Note e This setting is available only when Connection Mode is set to Static Value Range Max 15 characters n n n n n 0 255 except 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 127 0 0 1 etc Default Value Not stored Phone User Interface Reference Configuring Settings from the Base Unit KX TGP550 only Handset Page 15 Configuration File Reference STATIC_IP_ADDRESS Page 151 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 63 3 4 1 Basic Network Settings Subnet Mask Description Specifies the subnet mask for the unit Note e This setting is available only when Connection Mode is set to Static Value Range Max 15 characters n n n n n 0 255 except 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 127 0 0 1 etc Default Value Not stored Phone User Interface Reference Configuring Settings from the Base Unit KX TGP550 only Handset Page 15
157. ecifies the encryption key password used to decrypt configuration files Note e Ifthe extension of the configuration file is e2c the configuration file will be decrypted using this key Value Range 32 byte characters Note e Ifan empty string is set for this parameter decryption with this value is disabled Default Value Empty string CFG_FILE_KEY3 Value Format String Description Specifies the encryption key password used to decrypt configuration files Note s Ifthe extension of the configuration file is e3c the configuration file will be decrypted using this key Value Range 32 byte characters Note e Ifan empty string is set for this parameter decryption with this value is disabled Default Value Empty string CFG_FILE_KEY_LENGTH Value Format Integer Description Specifies the key lengths in bits used to decrypt configuration files Value Range e 128 e 192 e 256 Default Value 128 CFG_CYCLIC Value Format Boolean 148 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 4 3 5 Provisioning Settings Description Specifies whether the unit periodically checks for updates of configuration files Value Range e Y Enable periodic synchronization of configuration files e N Disable periodic synchronization of configuration files Default Value N Web User Interface Reference Cyclic Au
158. ed on the base unit KX TGP550 only or handset In cases when buttons soft key icons are shown in English alphabet Base unit EXIT Handset OFF In cases when buttons soft key icons are shown in symbols pictures Base unit C gt Handset Al IP Reset was performed on the base unit KX TGP550 only or handset 3 7 6 Export Phonebook e While transferring the phonebook data the connection with the base unit KX TGP550 only or handset was interrupted 3 7 5 Import Phonebook 3 7 6 Export Phonebook Failed Invalid File The operation failed because e The imported UTF 16 text file has an invalid BOM Byte order Mark 3 7 5 Import Phonebook e The firmware file is corrupted or invalid 3 8 2 Local Firmware Update Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 55 3 3 Status Result Message Description Applicable Screens Failed File Size Error The operation failed because e The size of the imported phonebook is too large 3 7 5 Import Phonebook e The size of the firmware file is insufficient 3 8 2 Local Firmware Update Failed No Handset or Busy The operation failed because e When attempting to import export the phonebook data the handset had not been registered yet or the connection with the base unit KX TGP550 only or handset has been disconnected e When attempting to import export the phonebook data a
159. efault setting for Enable VLAN is No For details about configuring VLAN settings from the Web user interface see 3 4 2 2 VLAN Settings To enable VLAN settings In cases when buttons soft key icons are shown in English alphabet 1 Base unit MENU middle soft key 5 3 0 Handset MENU center of joystick gt 5 3 0 2 Y A Select VLAN setting gt SELECT 3 V 4 Select Enable VLAN gt SELECT 4 Til Select Yes SAVE e Select No to disable VLAN settings 5 Base unit EXIT Handset OFF In cases when buttons soft key icons are shown in symbols pictures 1 Base unit middle soft key 5 3 0 Handset center of joystick gt 5 3 0 2 YA Select VLAN setting gt Il Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 35 2 1 4 IP Reset Y 4 Select Enable vran gt X V a Select Yes gt JA Select No to disable VLAN settings Base unit lt gt Handset A To set VLAN for IP Phone PC In cases when buttons soft key icons are shown in English alphabet 1 See rea eS NM Base unit MENU middle soft key gt 5 3 0 Handset MENU center of joystick gt 5 3 0 V a Select VLAN setting gt SELECT V a Select IP Phone or Pc gt SELECT V a Select VLAN ID SELECT Use the dial keys to enter the VLAN ID 14094 SAVE V a Select Priority gt SELECT Use the di
160. entication ID Authentication Password us Enable DNS SRV lookup O Yes No SRV lookup Prefix for UDP ep udp ete ee 3 6 2 1 Phone Number Phone Number Description Specifies the phone number to use as the user ID required for registration to the SIP registrar server Value Range Max 24 characters consisting of 0 9 and Note No other characters are allowed Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference PHONE_NUMBER_ 1 8 Page 195 3 6 2 2 SIP Server Registrar Server Address Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP registrar server Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 83 3 6 2 SIP Settings Line 1 Line 8 Value Range Max 127 characters Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference SIP_RGSTR_ADDR 1 8 Page 180 Registrar Server Port Description Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP registrar server Value Range 1 65535 Default Value 5060 Configuration File Reference SIP_RGSTR_PORT 1 8 Page 180 Proxy Server Address Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP proxy server Value Range Max 127 characters Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference SIP_PRXY_ADDR_ 1 8 Page 179 Proxy Server Port Description Specifies the port numbe
161. entry is not added The phonebook for a unit has the following limitations A maximum of 100 phonebook entries can be stored in the base unit KX TGP550 only and each of the handsets If the base unit or handset already has phonebook data it accepts up to the 100th entry including the existing entries The rest of the entries will not be imported and the message Memory Full is displayed on the unit The name can contain up to 16 characters The phone number can contain up to 32 digits Phonebook entries exceeding the characters or digits limits cannot be imported properly If the export is interrupted by an operation on the base unit KX TGP550 only or handset only the data that has been successfully exported before the interruption is exported to a file 5 2 2 Editing with Microsoft Excel You can edit exported phonebook data on a PC with software such as Microsoft Excel You can then import the phonebook data into units To open the phonebook data on a PC 1 Open Microsoft Excel 2 Click Office Button and then Open Note Make sure to open a TSV file in this procedure If you change the extension of a TSV file to csv the file will open by simply double clicking it However the character encoding of the file might not be recognized properly resulting in garbled characters or the phone numbers might be recognized as numbers resulting in data alteration 3 Select All Files for the file type select the exported
162. er s source port numbers forwarded port numbers which are the same as the numbers of the WAN and LAN ports set on the router in Source Port RTP Real time Transport Protocol Setup If the unit is connected to a network that uses a NAT router and a private IP address is assigned to each terminal on the network you must configure the RTP function for the unit and router so that the units can perform voice transmission between each other using a peer to peer connection However if your phone system supports the SBC Session Border Controller function it is not necessary to configure these settings For details about the SBC function consult your phone system dealer For details about Web user interface programming see 3 4 5 Static NAPT Settings To configure the RTP function on the unit 1 In the Web user interface click the Network tab click Static NAPT Settings and then enter the router s global IP address in Global IP Address 2 In External RTP Port enter the router s source port numbers forwarded port numbers Note e Specify a unique value for each of the 3 ports Router Setup When configuring the port forwarding function specify the router s reception port number as the unit s port number Port forwarding should be configured for the ports specified in Source Port gt see SIP Setup in this section and External RTP Port gt see RTP Real time Transport Protocol Setup in this section Set
163. ersion 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 79 3 5 5 Time Adjust Settings Time Description Specifies the start time of DST Summer Time in minutes after 12 00 AM Value Range 0 1439 Default Value 120 Configuration File Reference DST_START_TIME Page 138 3 5 5 6 End Day and Time of DST End Day and Time of Summer Time Month Description Selects the month in which DST Summer Time ends Value Range e January e February e March e April e May June e July e August e September October November e December Default Value October Configuration File Reference DST_STOP_MONTH Page 138 Day of Week Using the 2 following settings specify on which day of the selected month DST Summer Time ends For example to specify the second Sunday select Second and Sunday Description Selects the number of the week on which DST Summer Time ends Value Range e First Second e Third Fourth Last Default Value Second Configuration File Reference DST_STOP_ORDINAL_DAY Page 138 Description Selects the day of the week on which DST Summer Time ends 80 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 6 1 SIP Settings Value Range e Sunday e Monday e Tuesday e Wednesday e Thursday e Friday e Saturday Default Value Sunday Configuration File Reference DST_STOP_DAY_OF_WEEK
164. erver 83 SIP Service Domain 85 SIP Setting 82 SIP Settings 29 81 83 130 178 SIP Settings Line 1 Line 8 83 SIP Setup 29 SIP Source Address Filter SSAF 90 195 SIP Source Port 30 85 SIP User Agent 82 SIP_100REL_ENABLE_ 1 8 188 SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_ 1 8 188 SIP_2NDPROXY_ADDR_ 1 8 183 SIP_2NDPROXY_PORT_ 1 8 184 SIP_2NDPRSNC_ADDR_ 1 8 189 SIP_2NDPRSNC_PORT_ 1 8 189 SIP_2NDRGSTR_ADDR_ 1 8 184 SIP_2NDRGSTR_PORT_ 1 8 184 SIP_ANM_DISPNAME _ 1 8 194 SIP_ANM_HOSTNAME _ 1 8 194 SIP_ANM_USERNAME 1 8 194 SIP_AUTHID_ 1 8 178 SIP_DETECT_SSAF_ 1 8 195 SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_ 1 8 186 SIP_FOVR_MAX_ 1 8 186 SIP_FOVR_NORSP_ 1 8 186 SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR_ 1 8 193 SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_ 1 8 193 SIP_P_PREFERRED_ID_ 1 8 191 SIP_PASS_ 1 8 179 SIP_PRIVACY_ 1 8 192 SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_ 1 8 188 SIP_PRSNC_PORT_ 1 8 189 SIP_PRXY_ADDR_ 1 8 179 SIP_PRXY_PORT_ 1 8 180 SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_ 1 8 180 Document Version 2010 03 15 SIP_RGSTR_PORT_ 1 8 180 SIP_SESSION_TIME_ 1 8 181 SIP_SRC_PORT_ 1 8 179 SIP_SUBS_EXPIRE_ 1 8 190 SIP_SVCDOMAIN_ 1 8 180 SIP_TCP_SRV_PREFIX_ 1 8 187 SIP_TIMER_T1_ 1 8 184 SIP_TIMER_T2_ 1 8 185 SIP_TRANSPORT_ 1 8 193 SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_ 1 8 187 SIP_USER_AGENT 178 Source Port 85 Speed Duplex 34 65 Speed Duplex Settings 34 SRV lookup Prefix for TCP 87 SRV lookup Prefix for UDP 87 SSAF SIP Source Address Filter 90 195 SSL 25 Standard Configuration File 22 121 144 Standard File URL 121 St
165. escription Selects whether to enable the Do Not Disturb feature for incoming calls Note e If Do Not Disturb has been enabled on the server the server rejects incoming calls and the unit does not receive any calls even if you have selected No for this setting Ifyou change this setting when Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward is set to Yes the change to this setting is not immediately applied on this screen In this case reload the screen to confirm that the change is applied Value Range e Yes e No Default Value No Unconditional Enable Call Forward 108 Description Selects whether to forward all incoming calls to a specified destination Note e If Do Not Disturb has been enabled on the server the server rejects incoming calls and the unit does not receive any calls even if you have selected Yes for this setting Ifyou have selected Yes for this setting and Call Forward has been enabled on the server but the forwarding destinations differ incoming calls are forwarded to the destination set on the server e If Call Forward has been enabled on the server incoming calls are forwarded to the destination set on the server even if you have selected No for this setting e You can synchronize the Do Not Disturb and Call Forward settings from the Web user interface gt see Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward in 3 7 3 1 Call Control or through configuration file prog
166. et selection for receiving calls Grouping Handset Handset selection for receiving calls Line No Phone Number Handset No Base 3 4 1111 2222 3333 4444 5555 6666 7777 OINI oO oO PP Ww Mi 8888 Case 1 A call dialed to 1111 will be received by handset 1 Case 2 A call dialed to 2222 will be received by handset 2 Case 3 A call dialed to 8888 will be received by the base unit and handsets 1 6 198 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 5 2 Phonebook Import and Export Programming Example 2 The following programming example shows a configuration where handsets 1 3 dial with lines 1 3 respectively Each handset uses the line set in Default by default You can program this table using Web user interface programming gt see 3 7 1 2 Handset and Line No selection for making calls Handset and Line No selection for making calls Handset Line No Ge 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 v v v 1 2 v v v 2 3 v v v 3 4 5 6 Base Case 1 When a user goes off hook with handset 1 line 1 is seized and dialed by default Line 2 and line 3 can also be seized and dialed Case 2 When a user goes off hook with handset 2 line 2 is seized and dialed by default Line 1 and line 3 can also be seized and dialed Case 3 When a user goes off hook with
167. eted successfully the status LED lights in the following order Red Green gt Orange gt Red gt 3 When the status LED lights as described in step e turn off the unit s power When the unit is distributed to end users and started up in real circumstances provisioning will be performed correctly Note This example describes the case when only one unit is connected However multiple units can be configured through the same procedure without changing any settings because the MAC address is specified by the MAC macro 20 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 1 1 6 Provisioning 1 1 6 Provisioning 1 1 6 1 What is Provisioning After pre provisioning has been performed gt see 1 1 5 Pre provisioning you can set up the unit automatically by downloading the configuration file stored on the provisioning server into the unit This is called provisioning Phone system dealer End user configuration Provisioning 1 1 6 2 Protocols for Provisioning Provisioning can be performed over HTTP HTTPS FTP and TFTP The protocol you should use differs depending on how you will perform provisioning Normally HTTP HTTPS or FTP is used for provisioning If you are transmitting encrypted configuration files it is recommended that you use HTTP If you are transmitting unencrypted configuration files it is recommended that you use HTTPS You may not be able to use FTP depending on the conditi
168. ettings EE 69 Enable Eege Ee 69 ee 69 Proxy Servet PO dE 69 3 4 4 Global Address Detection 2 u 2 2 En nina 70 3 4 4 1 Global Address Detection nenn 70 Detection Method asic eit een 70 Detection Internal 70 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 Table of Contents 3 4 4 2 3 4 5 3 4 5 1 3 4 5 2 3 4 5 3 3 5 3 5 1 3 5 1 1 3 5 2 3 5 2 1 3 5 5 2 3 5 5 3 3 5 5 4 3 5 5 5 3 5 5 6 1 1 1 o AAO 1 2 3 6 2 3 6 2 1 3 6 2 2 STUN e e 70 STUN EC 70 STUN Server Port 71 Statie NAP le CN 71 Glopal Address E 72 EE e 72 Enable Global IP Address Usage per Line anne 72 Eine TELINE EE 72 External RTP Port 0 cc ceesseeseeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 72 En le EE 72 SVS CEN E 73 WA Ue EA AI EE 73 Wep e We CG 73 Bee Vas UE 73 Administrator Password EEN 74 Change Administrator Password cccccsccscscsc ecsccecerensesenesteacaccecetenseennenntensndenscseess 74 New Password 74 Confirm New Password aan ea 74 Change User PASS EE 75 Change User PASS WO BE 75 New Password 75 Confirm New PASS WONG BEE 75 Wep Server Se e S DPBRREDEERBRERLDEFEBENENSEPNLEEEFTLEERCHERERSENDBEREPECHEEEELTEEELEENEREEREELPNPERBEELEREEEREEVFEREESS 76 Web Server Settings EE 76 Web Server Port 76 Port Close Mem nenn nnnnnnnonnnnennneennn nennen E EE 76 Time Adjust Settings E 77 SS UTM AUN ae ee ee ee 77 Enable Synchronization
169. ff 11 separated by commas Value Range 0 5000 0 Infinite time Default Value 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 0 0 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 4 5 2 Tone Settings Web User Interface Reference Tone Timings Page 114 REORDER_TONE_FRQ Value Format Comma separated Integer Description Specifies the dual tone frequencies in hertz of reorder tones using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma Value Range 0 200 1000 0 No tone Default Value 480 620 Web User Interface Reference Tone Frequencies Page 114 REORDER_TONE_TIMING Value Format Comma separated Integer Description Specifies the pattern in milliseconds of reorder tones using 8 whole numbers on 1 off 1 on 2 off 2 on 3 off 3 on 4 off 4 separated by commas Value Range 0 5000 0 Infinite time Default Value 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 Web User Interface Reference Tone Timings Page 115 HOWLER_TONE_FRQ Value Format Comma separated Integer Description Specifies the dual tone frequencies in hertz of howler tones i e alarm tones using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma Value Range 0 200 3000 0 No tone Default Value 1400 2060 Web User Interface Reference Tone Frequencies Page 115 HOWLER_TONE_TIMING Value Format C
170. ffServ and the corresponding decimal value to be specified in this parameter Best Effort default 000 000 00 0 AF11 DSCP 10 001 010 00 S AF12 DSCP 12 AF13 DSCP 14 DSCP 18 AF22 DSCP 20 AF23 DSCP 22 AF31 DSCP 26 AF32 DSCP 28 AF33 DSCP 30 AF41 DSCP 34 AF42 DSCP 36 AF43 DSCP 38 100 110 00 CS1 ToS 1 001 000 00 32 CS2 ToS 2 010 000 00 64 CS3 ToS 3 011 000 00 96 CS4 ToS 4 100 000 00 128 Default Value 0 Web User Interface Reference SIP Packet QoS DSCP Page 89 SIP_2NDPROXY_ADDR_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example SIP_2NDPROXY ADDR_1 SIP_2NDPROXY_ADDR_2 SIP_2NDPROXY ADDR_8 Value Format String Description Specifies the IP address of the secondary SIP proxy server Note e This setting is available only when SIP_PRXY_ADDR_ 1 8 is specified in IP address notation Value Range IP address in dotted decimal notation Default Value Empty string Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 183 4 7 2 SIP Settings SIP_2NDPROXY_PORT_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example SIP_2NDPROXY_PORT_1 SIP_2NDPROXY_PORT_2 SIP_2NDPROXY_PORT_8 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the port number to use for communication with the secondary SIP proxy server Value Range 1 65535 Default Value 5060 SIP_2NDRGSTR_ADDR_
171. fied in IP address notation Value Range IP address in dotted decimal notation Default Value Empty string STUN_2NDSERV_PORT Value Format Integer Description Specifies the port number of the secondary STUN server Value Range 1 65535 Default Value 3478 4 4 7 Miscellaneous Network Settings NW_SETTING_ENABLE Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to enable the network settings from the base unit and handsets Note e Ifyou change this setting to N when the network settings with the exception of HOST_NAME in 4 4 1 IP Settings have been made through Web user interface programming clear these settings once by performing Reset Web Settings from the Web user interface and then change this setting to N Value Range e y Enable network settings e N Disable network settings Default Value H CUSTOM WER PAGE Value Format Integer Description Specifies whether to enable the settings in 3 4 1 Basic Network Settings and 3 5 5 Time Adjust Settings from the Web user interface when logged in with the User account 160 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 4 5 1 Call Control Settings Value Range 0 3 0 Enable Basic Network Settings and Time Adjust Settings 1 Disable Basic Network Settings 2 Disable Time Adjust Settings 3 Disable Basic Network Settings and Time Adjust Settings
172. figuring Settings from the Base Unit KX TGP550 only Handset Page 15 Web User Interface Reference Default Gateway Page 64 USER_DNS1_ADDR Value Format String Description Specifies the IP address of the primary DNS server Note e This setting is available only when CONNECTION _TYPE is set to 0 and when NW_SETTING_ENABLE is set to N Value Range IP address in dotted decimal notation Default Value Empty string Phone User Interface Reference Configuring Settings from the Base Unit KX TGP550 only Handset Page 15 Web User Interface Reference DNS1 Page 64 USER_DNS2_ADDR Value Format String Description Specifies the IP address of the secondary DNS server Note e This setting is available only when CONNECTION_TYPE is set to 0 and when NW_SETTING ENABLE is set to N Value Range IP address in dotted decimal notation Default Value Empty string Phone User Interface Reference Configuring Settings from the Base Unit KX TGP550 only Handset Page 15 Web User Interface Reference DNS2 Page 65 4 4 2 DNS Settings DNS_QRY_PRLL Value Format Boolean Description Specifies the DNS query method as parallel or sequential Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 153 4 4 2 DNS Settings Value Range e Y Parallel N Sequential Note
173. g When you save the text file it must be saved using the same format or the text might become garbled Phonebook Data in Text Format 0 8 Aaron MacDowel 101234001 Barbara Nicolls 101234002 Carl O Brien 5 101234003 Dorothy Parker 101234004 Name Tab Phone number Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 201 5 2 1 Import Export Operation Phonebook Data in Binary Format 00 72 00 6F 00 6F 00 77 33 00 34 BOM Space between the first name and last name Tab Line feed 5 2 1 Import Export Operation The following procedures explain how to import phonebook data to units and how to export phonebook data from units to a PC through the Web user interface 202 E or details about the settings see 3 7 5 Import Phonebook or 3 7 6 Export Phonebook To import phonebook data 1 2 3 4 Click the Telephone tab and then click Import Phonebook In Import Phonebook select the base unit KX TGP550 only or the handset that you want to import data into In File Name enter the full path to the file that you want to import or click Browse to select the phonebook data file that you want to import Click Import To export the phonebook data 1 2 3 o gt Click the Telephone tab and then click Export Phonebook In Export Phonebook select the base unit KX TG
174. g events regarding VoIP operation Note e This setting is not applicable for the current version No logs will be sent to the syslog server even if values 1 6 are specified Description Specifies the threshold of syslog events regarding telephone functions Note e This setting is not applicable for the current version No logs will be sent to the syslog server even if values 1 6 are specified Value Range 0 6 Default Value 0 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 4 3 4 Firmware Update Settings SYSLOG_ADDR Value Format String Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the syslog server Value Range Max 127 characters IP address in dotted decimal notation or FQDN Default Value Empty string SYSLOG PORT Value Format Integer Description Specifies the port number of the syslog server Value Range 1 65535 Default Value 514 SYSLOG_RTPSMLY_INTVL_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example SYSLOG_RTPSMLY_INTVL_1 SYSLOG_RTPSMLY INTVL_2 SYSLOG_RTPSMLY INTVL_8 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the interval in seconds to send summarized information of RTP packets to the syslog server Value Range 0 5 65535 0 No information sent Default Value 20 4 3 4 Firmware Update Settings FIRM_UPGRADE_ENABLE Value Format Boolean Description Spe
175. gorithm in all material mentioning or referencing this software or this function License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are identified as derived from the RSA Data Security Inc MD5 Message Digest Algorithm in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work RSA Data Security Inc makes no representations concerning either the merchantability of this software or the suitability of this software for any particular purpose It is provided as is without express or implied warranty of any kind These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and or software lt lt MT19937 gt gt The MT19937 software that Takuji Nishimura and Makoto Matsumoto developed is contained and this product shall be used subject to the following license conditions Copyright C 1997 2002 Makoto Matsumoto and Takuji Nishimura All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 The names of its contributors may not be used
176. gs that are specific to each line Panasonic KX TGP550T04 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance VoIP Settings Line 1 Web Port Close VoIP Quality of Service QoS RTP Packet QoS DSCP Best Effort default 000 000 v Line 2 ar RTCP Interval 0 seconds 5 65535 0 Disable ey Maximum Delay 20 3 50 Line 6 Line 7 Minimum Delay 2 1 2 Lines Initial Delay 2 1 7 VoIP Settings DTMF Type Outband Inband Telephone event Payload Type 101 96 127 ern Yes O No First CODEC PCMA Second CODEC G726 32 Third CODEC G729A Fourth CODEC PCMU Save 92 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 6 4 VoIP Settings Line 1 Line 8 3 6 4 1 Quality of Service QoS RTP Packet QoS DSCP Description Selects the DSCP level of DiffServ applied to RTP packets Value Range e Best Effort default 000 000 e AF11 Class1 Level Low 001 010 e AF12 Class1 Level Medium 001 100 e AF13 Class1 Level High 001 110 e AF21 Class2 Level Low 010 010 e AF22 Class2 Level Medium 010 100 e AF23 Class2 Level High 010 110 e AF31 Class3 Level Low 011 010 e AF32 Class3 Level Medium 011 100 e AF33 Class3 Level High 011 110 e AF41 Class4 Level Low 100 010 e AF42 Class4 Level Medium 100 100 e AF43 Class4 Level High 100 110 e CS1 Class1 001 000 e CS2 Class2 010 000 e CS3 Class3 011 000 e CS4 Class4 100 000
177. h the Web user interface see 3 4 4 Global Address Detection To set Global Address Detection 1 In the Web user interface click the Network tab click Global Address Detection and then select STUN for Detection Method e Select SIP for Detection Method to perform Global Address Detection by sending SIP messages 2 Enter the desired detection interval seconds in Detection Interval s When you select SIP for Detection Method the value 0 disables detection and a value other than 0 enables detection 3 If you selected STUN for Detection Method enter the STUN server address IP address or FQDN in STUN Server Address 4 Ifyou selected STUN for Detection Method enter the port number used by the STUN server in STUN Server Port Note For details about server information consult your network administrator 1 2 Reset and Firmware Update 1 2 1 Reset 1 2 1 1 Resetting the Network Settings IP Reset Performing IP Reset from the phone user interface gt see 2 1 4 IP Reset restores the basic network settings made through phone user interface programming or Web user interface programming to their factory defaults If the unit is unable to connect to the network after changing network settings you can restore the network settings to their factory defaults by performing IP Reset and then try configuring the settings again Settings such as the phonebook data are not cleared by this feature
178. handset 3 line 3 is seized and dialed by default Line 1 and line 2 can also be seized and dialed Note e You can make a call with one of the phone numbers other than the default phone number For details about the operations refer to the User Guide or Quick Guide on the Panasonic Web site gt see Introduction 5 2 Phonebook Import and Export This section explains how to import and export phonebook data Phonebook data of the unit includes names and phone numbers Phonebook data on the unit can be exported edited with editor tools and imported again In addition phonebook data created with other software can be imported into the unit You can use the phonebook import and export functions as follows Editing Phonebook Data on a PC The phonebook data stored on the unit can be edited using a program such as Microsoft Excel spreadsheet software For details about the operation see 5 2 2 Editing with Microsoft Excel Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 199 5 2 Phonebook Import and Export You can export the phonebook data to the PC edit the exported file using appropriate software and then import it into the unit Microsoft Excel Importing Address Book Data from a PC You can import address book data stored in programs such as Microsoft Outlook messaging and collaboration client into the unit First export address book data from the e mail software to a program such as Microsoft Excel edit it
179. he Web user interface or INTDIGIT TIM in 4 5 1 Call Control Settings in the configuration file The user presses the key The call is initiated after going off hook pre dial Dial Plan Example 208 The following example shows dial plans containing character sequences separated by Example 2346789 11 01 2 9 xx 2 9 xxxxxxxxx Complete Match Example 2346789 11 01 2 9 xx 2 9 xxxxxxxxx e If the dialed phone number is 211 911 and so on the call is made immediately Example 2346789 11 01 2 9 xx 2 9 xxxxxxxxx e Ifthe dialed phone number is 2123456789 5987654321 and so on the call is made immediately Partial Match when the dial plan contains Example 2346789 11 01 2 9 xx 2 9 xxxxxxxxx e Ifthe dialed phone number is 01254 012556 and so on the call is made after the inter digit timer expires e If the dialed phone number is 01254 012556 and so on the call is made immediately Partial Match when the dial plan does not contain Example 2346789 11 01 2 9 xx 2 9 xxxxxxxxx e Ifthe dialed phone number is 21 91 and so on when Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match is set to Yes the call is made after the inter digit timer expires e Ifthe dialed phone number is 21 91 and so on when Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match is set to Yes the call is made immediately e Ifthe dialed phone number is 21 91 and so on when Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not
180. he password are masked by special characters which differ depending on the Web browser s After you change the administrator password the next time you access the Web user interface the authentication dialog box appears 2 consecutive login failures will result in an error 401 Unauthorized This restriction only applies the first time you attempt to log in after changing the password In all other circumstances an error occurs after 3 unsuccessful login attempts Panasonic KX TGP550T04 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance Change Administrator Password Web Port Close System Change Administrator Password Web Language New Password DT 6 16 characters Administrator Password SE Confirm New Password s See ance 3 5 2 1 Change Administrator Password New Password Description Specifies the password to use to authenticate the Administrator account when logging in to the Web user interface Value Range 6 16 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value adminpass Configuration File Reference ADMIN_PASS Page 135 Confirm New Password 74 Description Specifies the same password that you entered in New Password for confirmation Value Range 6 16 characters except amp lt gt and space Note e This value must be the same as the value entered in New Password Default Value adminpass Configuration F
181. he unit will play a busy tone Value Range 10 600 Default Value 30 INTDIGIT_TIM Value Format Integer Description Specifies the length of time in seconds within which subsequent digits of a dial number must be dialed When this timer expires after the last key was pressed dialing will start Value Range 3 10 Default Value 5 Web User Interface Reference Inter digit Timeout Page 102 VM_SUBSCRIBE_ENABLE Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to send the SUBSCRIBE request to a voice mail server Note e Your phone system must support voice mail Value Range Send the SUBSCRIBE request e Nw Do not send the SUBSCRIBE request Default Value N Web User Interface Reference Send SUBSCRIBE to Voice Mail Server Page 102 4 5 2 Tone Settings DIAL_TONE_FRQ Value Format Comma separated Integer Description Specifies the dual tone frequencies in hertz of dial tones using 2 whole numbers separated by acomma 162 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 4 5 2 Tone Settings Value Range 0 200 1000 0 No tone Note e Ifthe value for this setting is 350 440 the unit will use a mixed signal of a 350 Hz tone and a 440 Hz tone Default Value 350 440 Web User Interface Reference Tone Frequencies Page 112 DIAL_TONE_TIMING
182. hown below PCC Standard Format File DO NOT CHANGE THIS LINE Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 4 2 2 Configuration File Parameters Configuration files must end with an empty line Each parameter line is written in the form of XXX yyy XXX parameter name yyy parameter value The value must be enclosed by double quotation marks A parameter line written over multiple lines is not allowed It will cause an error on the configuration file resulting in invalid provisioning Configuration Parameters Both the KX TGP500 and KX TGP550 support multiple telephone lines For some parameters the value for each line must be specified independently A parameter name with the suffix _1 is the parameter for line 1 _2 for line 2 and so on Examples of setting the line phone number for accessing a voice mail server VM_NUMBER_1 for line 1 VM_NUMBER_ 2 for line 2 VM_NUMBER_ 8 for line 8 The maximum length of a parameter name is 32 characters The maximum length of a parameter value is 500 characters excluding double quotation marks No space characters are allowed in the line except when the value includes a space character s Example DISPLAY NAME 1 John Smith valid DISPLAY NAME 1 John Smith invalid Some parameter values can be specified as empty to set the parameter values to empty Example NTP_ADDR The parameters have no order If the same parameter is specified in
183. hronize the Do Not Disturb and Call Forward settings configured via the Web user interface or phone user interface between the unit and the portal server that is provided by your phone system dealer Note e Even if you specify Y this feature may not function properly if your phone system does not support it Before you configure this setting consult your phone system dealer e You cannot set both SHARED CALL ENABLE 1 8 and SYNCHRONIZATION ENABLE 1 8 to Y at the same time Value Range e Y Enable Do Not Disturb Call Forward synchronization e N Disable Do Not Disturb Call Forward synchronization Default Value N Web User Interface Reference Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward Page 106 PRIVACY MODE 1 8 Parameter Name Example PRIVACY MODE _1 PRIVACY_MODE 2 PRIVACY_MODE_ 8 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to enable privacy mode which prohibits another handset or base unit from barging in on a conversation Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 177 4 7 2 SIP Settings Value Range e y Enable privacy mode e N Disable privacy mode Note e If set to Y the conversation cannot be interrupted by another handset or base unit e If set to N the conversation can be interrupted by another handset or base unit Default Value Y Web User Interface Reference Enable Privacy Mode Page 104
184. ik Sais Operating BANK Bank1 IPL Version 01 02 R A Bank1 11 70 Firmware Version Bank2 11 60 3 3 1 1 Version Information Model Description Indicates the model number of the unit reference only Value Range Model number Default Value Current model number Operating BANK Description Indicates the storage area of the firmware that is currently operating reference only Value Range e Bank4 e Bank Default Value Not applicable IPL Version Description Indicates the version of the IPL Initial Program Load that runs when starting the unit reference only Value Range IPL version nn nn n 0 9 Default Value Current IPL version Firmware Version Description Indicates the version of the firmware that is currently installed on the unit reference only Value Range Bank1 Bank2 Firmware version nn nn n 0 9 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 57 3 3 2 Network Status Default Value Current firmware version 3 3 2 Network Status This screen allows you to view the current network information of the unit such as the MAC address IP address Ethernet port status etc Clicking Refresh updates the information displayed on the screen Panasonic KX TGP550T04 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance Network Status Web Port Close Refresh
185. ile with the fields separated by tabs Note e The procedure may vary depending on the software version of Microsoft Excel Therefore files exported and imported between the unit and Microsoft Excel are not always compatible with each other 5 2 3 Exporting Data from Microsoft Outlook You can export address book data stored in programs such as Microsoft Outlook and then edit the exported data with a program such as Microsoft Excel in order to import it to the unit To export the Microsoft Outlook address book data In Microsoft Outlook click File and then click Import and Export Select Export to a file and click Next Select Tab Separated Values Windows and click Next Select Contacts and click Next Click Browse select a folder and then enter the file name to export the data to Click OK On the Export to a File window click Next Click Map Custom Fields Clear all items in the To list by clicking Clear Map Then drag only Last Name and Business Phone from the From list to the To list and click OK On the Export to a File window click Finish The data will be exported SaaS amp SS zech CO Note e You can export data from Microsoft Outlook Express by using a similar procedure It is also possible to export data from other applications that are compatible with Microsoft Excel e You can open the exported file in Microsoft Excel and then import it to the unit For details see 5 2 2 Editing with Microsoft Excel
186. ile Reference ADMIN_PASS Page 135 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 5 3 Change User Password 3 5 3 Change User Password This screen allows you to change the password used to authenticate the User account when logging in to the Web user interface Note e For security reasons the characters entered for the password are masked by special characters which differ depending on the Web browser e After you change the user password the next time you access the Web user interface the authentication dialog box appears 2 consecutive login failures will result in an error 401 Unauthorized This restriction only applies the first time you attempt to log in after changing the password In all other circumstances an error occurs after 3 unsuccessful login attempts Panasonic KX TGP550T04 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance Change User Password Web Port Close System Change User Password New Password 6 16 characters Administrator Password Change User Password Confirm New Password Web Server Settings Save Led 3 5 3 1 Change User Password New Password Description Specifies the password to use to authenticate the User account when logging in to the Web user interface Value Range 6 16 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value Not stored Note s When a user logs in to the Web user interface for the first time after clicking OK on the authen
187. ine from 1 8 with SDP_CODECx_y x priority y line number Value Range Max 32 characters G722 PCMA G 711 A law 6726 32 G 726 32k G729A PCMU G 711 u law Empty string Default Value G722 for SDP_CODECO_1 to SDP_CODECO_8 PCMA for SDP_CODEC1_1 to SDP_CODEC1_ 8 G726 32 for SDP_CODEC2_1 to SDP_CODEC2_8 G729A for SDP_CODEC3_1 to SDP_CODEC3_8 PCMU for SDP_CODEC4 1 to SDP_CODEC4_ 8 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 167 4 6 1 Codec Settings Web User Interface Reference First CODEC Page 95 e Second CODEC Page 96 e Third CODEC Page 96 e Fourth CODEC Page 97 e Fifth CODEC Page 97 SDP_CKRTE 0 4 1 8 Parameter Name Example SDP_CKRTEO_ 1 SDP_CKRTEO 2 SDP_CKRTEO_ 8 SDP_CKRTE1_1 SDP_CKRTE1_2 SDP_CKRTE1 8 SDP_CKRTE4_1 SDP_CKRTE4 2 SDP_CKRTE4 8 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the sampling rate with SDP_CKRTEx_y for the corresponding encoding name specified by SDP_CODECx_y x priority y line number Value Range 0 8000 or 16000 0 Unused SDP 8000 or 16000 Available SDPs Note e The value 16000 is valid only for the G722 codec Default Value 8000 SDP_PARAM 0 4 1 8 Parameter Name Example SDP_PARAMO_1 SDP_PARAMO 2 SDP_PARAMO_ 8 SDP_PARAM1_1 SDP_PARAM1 2 SDP_PARAM1 8 SDP_PARAM4 1 SDP_PARAM4 2 SDP_PARAM4 8
188. inues flashing in amber An IP address may not have been acquired or the static IP address is not appropriate Check the unit s IP address In cases when buttons soft key icons are shown in English alphabet Base unit KX TGP550 only MENU middle soft key gt 5 0 1 Handset MENU center of joystick gt 5 0 1 In cases when buttons soft key icons are shown in symbols pictures Base unit KX TGP550 only middle soft key gt 5 0 1 Handset center of joystick gt 5 0 1 It is recommended to perform the following If necessary change the unit s static IP address Ifan IP address was not acquired check your network devices router modem etc connections Ifthe connections are made properly but the problem persists check your network devices router modem etc settings Many installation issues can be resolved by resetting all the equipment First shut down your modem router hub base unit and PC Then turn the devices back on one at a time in this order modem router hub base unit PC If you cannot access Internet Web pages using your PC check to see if your phone system is having connection issues in your area Check the VoIP status in the Web user interface and confirm that each line is registered properly gt see To check the setting status in the Web user interface in this section Even when one line fails to register the indicator will f
189. ion file If the firmware update settings are properly configured in the configuration file the firmware update will be executed when the unit is restarted You can restart the unit to execute firmware update immediately For details about downloading configuration files see 1 1 6 4 Downloading Configuration Files 6 4 Local Firmware Update When an updated version of the firmware is provided on a Web site or other means you can perform the firmware update manually using Web user interface programming For details about the local firmware update see 3 8 2 Local Firmware Update To manually update the firmware 1 In the Web user interface click the Maintenance tab and then click Local Firmware Update 2 Click Browse select the folder where the firmware file is stored and specify the firmware file on your PC 3 Click Update Firmware Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 213 6 4 Local Firmware Update 214 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 Section 7 Troubleshooting This section provides information about troubleshooting Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 215 7 1 Troubleshooting 7 1 Troubleshooting If you still have difficulties after following the instructions in this section disconnect the base unit s AC adaptor then reconnect the base unit s AC adaptor Remove the batteries from the handset and then insert the batteries into the handset again General
190. ioning Page 120 CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH 144 Value Format String Description Specifies the URL of the standard configuration file which is used when every unit needs different settings Note e When you change this setting set PROVISION_ENABLE to Y at the same time Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 4 3 5 Provisioning Settings Value Range Max 255 characters Note e The format must be RFC 1738 compliant as follows lt schema gt lt user gt lt password gt lt host gt lt port gt lt url path gt lt user gt must be less than 64 characters lt password gt must be less than 64 characters lt user gt lt password gt may be empty The total of lt schema gt and lt host gt lt port gt lt url path gt must be less than 128 characters lt port gt can be omitted if you do not need to specify the port number If mac is included in this URL it will be replaced with the unit s MAC address in lower case s If MAC is included in this URL it will be replaced with the unit s MAC address in upper case e If MODEL is included in this URL it will be replaced with the unit s model name s H fwver is included in this URL it will be replaced with the unit s firmware version e If this URL ends with slash Config mac cfg is automatically added at the end of the URL For example CFG_STAND
191. ioning at regular intervals Provisioning by sending a NOTIFY message e In the configuration file Add the line PROVISION _ENABLE N In the Web user interface Click the Maintenance tab click Provisioning Maintenance and then select No for Enable Provisioning e To enable provisioning again in the Web user interface Click the Maintenance tab click Provisioning Maintenance and then select Yes for Enable Provisioning 1 1 6 5 Provisioning Server Setting Example This section gives an example of how to set up the units and provisioning server when configuring 2 units with configuration files The standard configuration files and the master configuration file are used in this example 24 Conditions Item Description Setting Provisioning server FQDN prov example com Units MAC addresses e 0080F0111111 e 0080F0222222 URL of the configuration files Configure the following 2 settings either by pre provisioning or through the Web user interface The values of both settings must be the same e CFG STANDARD FILE PATH http prov example com Panasonic Config MAC cfg e CFG MASTER FILE PATH http prov example com Panasonic ConfigCommon cfg Directory on the provisioning server containing the configuration files Create the Panasonic directory just under the HTTP root directory of the provisioning server File name of configuration files Store th
192. is parameter is usually set to 60 Default Value 60 Web User Interface Reference DST Offset Summer Time Offset Page 78 DST_START_MONTH Value Format Integer Description Specifies the month in which DST Summer Time starts Value Range 1 12 Default Value 3 Web User Interface Reference Month Page 79 DST_START_ORDINAL_DAY Value Format Integer Description Specifies the number of the week on which DST Summer Time starts The actual start day is specified in DST_START_DAY_OF_WEEK For example to specify the second Sunday specify 2 in this parameter and 0 in the next parameter Value Range 1 5 1 the first week of the month 2 the second week of the month 3 the third week of the month 4 the fourth week of the month 5 the fifth week of the month Default Value Web User Interface Reference Day of Week Page 79 DST_START_DAY_OF_WEEK Value Format Integer Description Specifies the day ofthe week on which DST Summer Time starts Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 137 4 3 2 System Time Settings Value Range Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday l Oo E oh A 0 Default Value Web User Interface Reference Day of Week Page 79 DST_START_TIME Value Format
193. l Send SUBSCRIBE to Voice Mail Server Conference Server Address Inter digit Timeout Emergency Call Phone Numbers 1 3 5 Call Rejection Phone Numbers 1 3 2010 03 15 Yes No 5 v seconds 2 4 2 Administrator Guide 101 3 7 2 Call Control 3 7 2 1 Call Control Send SUBSCRIBE to Voice Mail Server Description Selects whether to send the SUBSCRIBE request to a voice mail server Note e Your phone system must support voice mail Value Range e Yes No Default Value No Configuration File Reference VM_SUBSCRIBE_ENABLE Page 162 Conference Server Address Description Specifies the URI for a conference server which consists of a user part the symbol and a host part for example conference example com Note e Availability depends on your phone system Value Range Max 127 characters Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference CONFERENCE_SERVER_ADDRESS Page 161 Inter digit Timeout Description Specifies the length of time in seconds within which subsequent digits of a dial number must be dialed When this timer expires after the last key was pressed dialing will start Value Range 3 10 Default Value 5 Configuration File Reference INTDIGIT_TIM Page 162 102 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 7 2 Call Control 3
194. l is initiated Y The call is denied Does the dialed number of digits exceed the number of digits up to 2 characters before in the dial plan The call is initiated Does the user press the key The inter digit timer starts Does the user press the key Has Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match been set to Yes The call is initiated No Does the user dial the subsequent digit before the inter digit timer expires The inter digit timer starts Does the user dial SE Yes the subsequent digit The call is initiated before the inter digit timer expires To A Ne To A Has Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match been set to Yes 5 3 1 Dial Plan Settings To set Dial Plan 1 In the Web user interface click the Telephone tab and then click Call Control Line 1 Line 8 2 In Dial Plan enter the desired dial format The dial plan settings can be configured for each line separately 206 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 5 3 1 Dial Plan Settings For details about available characters for the dial format see Available Values for the Dial Plan Field in this section 3 a Yes or No for Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match If you select Yes the call will be made even if the user dials a phone
195. l number settings restored to automatic To perform IP Reset In cases when buttons soft key icons are shown in English alphabet 1 Base unit MENU middle soft key 7 3 0 Handset MENU center of joystick gt 7 3 0 2 Y A Select yes SELECT The settings are returned to their factory defaults and the base unit will restart In cases when buttons soft key icons are shown in symbols pictures 1 Base unit middle soft key gt 7 3 0 Handset center of joystick gt 7 3 0 2 Y a Select Yes gt OY The settings are returned to their factory defaults and the base unit will restart Notice e Once you press 7 3 0 IP Reset is performed immediately and without asking for confirmation regardless of the communication status As a result the base unit is disconnected from the IP network immediately Note e If these settings with the exception of PHY settings and terminal number settings were made through Web user interface programming the set values made through Web user interface programming remain effective even if you perform IP Reset To reset these settings to their factory defaults perform Reset Web Settings from the Web user interface again e If these settings with the exception of PHY settings and terminal number settings were made through configuration file programming the set values made through configuration file programming remain effective even if yo
196. lash in amber Check that the SIP server address URLs of the configuration files encryption key and other required settings are correct Check the firewall and port forwarding settings on the router gt see 1 1 10 Other Network Settings For details about settings consult your network administrator or phone system dealer The STATUS indicator or indicator flashes in amber rapidly although the IP address was acquired Unplug the unit s AC adaptor to reset the unit then reconnect the AC adaptor If the STATUS indicator or E indicator is still flashing in amber rapidly there may be a problem with the base unit hardware Contact your phone system dealer Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 217 7 1 Troubleshooting 218 Problem Cause Solution The STATUS indicator or 7 indicator lights in amber although the Ethernet cable is connected properly The unit s IP address may conflict with the IP addresses of other devices on your local network Check the unit s static IP address In cases when buttons soft key icons are shown in English alphabet Base unit KX TGP550 only MENU middle soft key gt 5 0 1 Handset MENU center of joystick gt 5 0 1 In cases when buttons soft key icons are shown in symbols pictures Base unit KX TGP550 only middle soft key gt 5 0 1 Handset center of joystick gt
197. lay the following acknowledgement This product includes software developed by the University of California Berkeley and its contributors 4 Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE However parts of the NetBSD Kernel are provided with the following copyright notices Copyright c 1980 1983 1988 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1980 1986 1989 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1980 1986 1991 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyrigh
198. lect each codec on once within CODEC Settings A maximum of 5 priorities can be assigned If only 4 codecs are specified in a configuration file you will be able to select from only 4 codecs and Fifth CODEC will be disabled The codec selections that are displayed may vary depending on the unit or the operating environment Default Value G729A Configuration File Reference SDP_CODEC 0 4 _ 1 8 Page 167 Fifth CODEC Description Selects the codec to assign the lowest priority to Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 97 3 7 1 Multi Number Settings Value Range 6722 PCMA G 711 A law G726 32 G 726 32k G729A PCMU G 711 p law Note e You can select each codec on once within CODEC Settings s A maximum of 5 priorities can be assigned If only 4 codecs are specified in a configuration file you will be able to select from only 4 codecs and Fifth CODEC will be disabled The codec selections that are displayed may vary depending on the unit or the operating environment Default Value PCMU Configuration File Reference SDP_CODEC 0 4 _ 1 8 Page 167 3 Telephone This section provides detailed descriptions about all the settings classified under the Telephone tab 3 7 1 Multi Number Settings This screen allows you to assign phone numbers for incoming and outgoing calls to the base unit KX TGP550 onl
199. lection other than PCMU Note Changing this setting may require restarting the unit Value Range 0 Do not set PCMU e 1 Set PCMU Default Value 1 CODEC_G729 PARAM Value Format Integer Description Specifies whether to add an attribute line a fmtp 18 annexb no to SDP when SDP_CODECx_y x priority y line number is set to G729A Note Changing this setting may require restarting the unit Value Range 0 Do not add a fmtp 18 annexb no e 1 Add a fmtp 18 annexb no Default Value 0 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 169 4 6 2 RTP Settings 4 6 2 RTP Settings TOS_RTP 1 8 170 Parameter Name Example TOS _RTP_1 TOS RTP_2 TOS RTP 8 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the value to be stored in the ToS Type of Service field in the IP header of RTP packets as a DSCP for DiffServ Note e The structures of the ToS DS field in an IP header are shown below ToS field 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 y Currently r Precedence Da Type of Service unused 3 bits 4 bits 1bit DS field 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Currently A DSCP unused 6bits 2 bits The ToS field consists of a 3 bit precedence a 4 bit type of service and a 1 bit unused field The DS filed consists of a 6 bit DSCP and a 2 bit unused field Administrat
200. lookup v Page 86 SRV lookup Prefix for UDP v Page 87 SRV lookup Prefix for TCP v Page 87 Timer Settings T1 Timer v Page 87 T2 Timer v Page 88 INVITE Retry Count v Page 88 Non INVITE Retry Count v Page 88 Quality of Service QoS SIP Packet QoS DSCP v Page 89 SIP extensions Supports 100rel RFC 3262 v Page 89 Supports Session Timer RFC v Page 90 4028 Keep Alive Keep Alive Interval v Page 90 Security Enable SSAF SIP Source Page 90 Address Filter VolP Settings RTP Settings RTP Packet Time Page 91 Minimum RTP Port Number Page 91 Maximum RTP Port Number Page 92 44 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 1 Web User Interface Setting List Access kl Menu Item Section Title Setting Level Ref U VolP Settings Quality of Service QoS RTP Packet QoS DSCP v Page 93 Line 1 Li ee trae Statistical Information RTCP Interval v Page 93 Jitter Buffer Maximum Delay v Page 93 Minimum Delay v Page 94 Initial Delay v Page 94 DTMF DTMF Type v Page 94 Telephone event Payload v Page 95 Type Call Hold Supports RFC 2543 vi Page 95 c 0 0 0 0 CODEC Settings First CODEC v Page 95 Second CODEC v Page 96 Third CODEC v Page 96 Fourth CODEC v Page 97 Fifth CODEC v Page 97 TI The access levels are abbreviated as follows U User A Administrator A check mark indicates that the
201. lt Value Empty string Phone User Interface Reference Configuring Settings from the Base Unit KX TGP550 only Handset Page 15 Web User Interface Reference Static IP Address Page 63 STATIC_SUBNET Value Format String Description Specifies the subnet mask for the unit Note e This setting is available only when CONNECTION_TYPE is set to 0 and when NW_SETTING ENABLE is set to N e When you specify this parameter you must specify STATIC_IP_ADDRESS together in a configuration file Value Range IP address in dotted decimal notation Default Value Empty string Phone User Interface Reference Configuring Settings from the Base Unit KX TGP550 only Handset Page 15 Web User Interface Reference Subnet Mask Page 64 STATIC_GATEWAY 152 Value Format String Description Specifies the IP address of the default gateway for the network where the unit is connected Note e This setting is available only when CONNECTION_TYPE is set to 0 and when NW_SETTING ENABLE is set to N e When you specify this parameter you must specify STATIC _IP_ADDRESS and STATIC SUBNET together ina configuration file Value Range IP address in dotted decimal notation Default Value Empty string Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 4 4 2 DNS Settings Phone User Interface Reference Con
202. ly Value Range Not applicable Default Value Not applicable Base KX TGP550 only Description Indicates the base unit that can be used to make a call reference only Value Range Not applicable Default Value Not applicable Line No Description Selects which lines 1 8 can be seized when going off hook to make a call for the base unit and each handset 100 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 Document Version 3 7 2 Call Control Value Range Selected Not selected Note e Ifyou clear all the check boxes for the base unit and the handsets calls cannot be made from either the base unit or the handsets Default Value Selected all Default Description Selects which line to seize automatically when going off hook to make a call for the base unit and each handset Note s Ifthe line selected as Default is not selected as a line that can be seized for the corresponding base unit or handset in Line No the unit cannot make a call Value Range 1 8 Default Value 3 7 2 Call Control This screen allows you to configure various call features that are common to all lines Panasonic KX TGP550T04 Web Port Close Telephone Multi Number Settings cau controt Line1 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance Call Control Call Contro
203. matically gt see 3 5 5 Time Adjust Settings e Ifthe time is still incorrect even after setting NTP synchronization check the firewall and port forwarding settings on the router gt see 1 1 10 Other Network Settings Checking the Status of the Unit You can check the status of the unit by using Web user interface programming gt see 3 3 2 Network Status and 3 3 3 VoIP Status or by looking at system logs gt see 4 3 3 Syslog Settings sent from the unit To check the setting status in the Web user interface 1 2 3 4 Click the Status tab and then click Network Status to check the network settings Check the status displayed Click VoIP Status to check the VoIP settings Check the status displayed To send the system logs of specified events to the syslog server 1 222 Set the following parameters to specify your PC Windows Linux operating system etc as the syslog server SYSLOG ADDR Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the syslog server SYSLOG PORT Specifies the port number of the syslog server Set the following parameters to log specific events SYSLOG EVENT SIP Logs SIP related syslog events SYSLOG_EVENT_ CFG Logs syslog events regarding configuration SYSLOG EVENT VOIP Logs syslog events regarding VoIP operation SYSLOG EVENT TEL Logs syslog events regarding telephone functions In this version of the unit this system log will not be sent Adminis
204. n amp lt gt or trailing spaces You can enter the IP address using dotted decimal notation i e n n n n where n 0 255 You cannot enter invalid IP addresses for example 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 or 127 0 0 1 Authentication ID Password field The field cannot contain amp lt gt or space The length of user password and administrator password must be from 6 to 16 characters Display Name field gt see Display Name in 3 7 3 1 Call Control This is the only field in which you can enter Unicode characters Result Messages When you click Save after changing the settings on the current configuration screen one of the following messages will appear in the upper left area of the current configuration screen Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 53 3 2 2 Accessing the Web User Interface 54 Result Message Description Applicable Screens Complete The operation has successfully completed All screens except 3 7 6 Export Phonebook Failed Parameter Error The operation failed because All screens Some specified values are out of range or invalid Failed Memory Access The operation failed because All screens Failure e Access error to the flash memory occurred while reading or writing the data Failed Transfer Failure The operation failed because All screens e A network error occurred during the data transmission Failed Busy
205. nary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 241 242 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 Index Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 243 Index Numerics 1 30 103 1 5 103 A Access Level 40 50 Access Levels IDs and Passwords 27 50 Accessing the Web User Interface 50 ADD_USER_PHONE _ 1 8 192 ADMIN_ID 134 ADMIN_PASS 135 Administrator Password 74 Audience 2 Authentication ID 86 Authentication Password 86 Available Values for the Dial Plan Field 207 B Base 100 Basic Netw
206. ncesatncneiasiuiadisnead cenbianchisnusicmsbdadehincrnandansmauancasiteedeieansasGsauacy 161 4 5 1 Gall lee E die DE 161 CONFERENCE SERVER ADDRESS geet uge tee 161 EMERGENCY FALLE I EE 161 FIRS PRIGI TIM zer ee ee 162 CRT AEN HIE 162 Viti SUBSCRIBE ENABLE E 162 4 5 2 Kee te CN 162 RE ra Sa FRO eee eee ea een 162 DIAL TONE HMING EE 163 BUSY TONE FRO 2 nase E ede ea epee eee 163 BUSY TONE TIMIDG 228 een 163 RINGING TONE EE 164 RINGING TONE TIMING c ccccccccesessssssesessesesscsesesessssesessestsneecsesenstettenensestesiesenes 164 II TONE PRO rere ree eee errr oe rere re eee ee eee eee errr rere 164 SIT_TONE Wl E 164 REORDER TONE FRI 2 ee ee 165 BEORDER TONE TIMING 165 PIOWLER TONE FR E 165 HOWLER_TONE_TIMING uassneseannnnnenennnnenenenennnnnannnnnnnnnennnnnnnannnnnnnennnnnnnnenennnnnn 165 HOWEER STARE TIME 2 2 tee ee ee 166 BELL_CORE_PATTERN TIMING 4 2222 ee ee eignen 166 BELL BORE PATTERNZZTIMINS ee u 166 BELL_CORE_PATTERN3_ TIMING ccccccccsesecscsesesesssscscsucecsssesessstesscsnsetssseneseeaees 166 BELL CORE PATTERNA TIMING u 2 nee 166 BELL VCORE PAT TERING TIMING ee een separaten 167 4 6 VolP Settings 1 Ener 167 4 6 1 Codec ln e CG 167 SEP Os Bs 9 Deiere eege 167 SDP ASR OSA 178 E 168 IP PAA EE EE 168 SDP PITYPEDA PB nissan engen 168 10 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 Table of Contents CODEC EE E 169 CODEC 6729 PARAM E 169 4 6 2 RIP eS menan a A E cae Gents tii
207. ndset does not receive calls gt see 3 7 3 3 Call Features If Unconditional Enable Call Forward is set to Yes the base unit or handset does not receive calls gt see 3 7 3 4 Call Forward If Block Anonymous Call is set to Yes the base unit or handset does not receive anonymous calls gt see 3 7 3 3 Call Features Check that Do Not Disturb Enable Call Forward and Block Anonymous Call are not controlled by your phone system If 3 calls are being handled by the base unit and or handsets simultaneously a new call cannot be received and the unit will not ring For details about settings consult your network administrator or phone system dealer Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 7 1 Troubleshooting Problem Cause Solution cannot make a call Check if the STATUS indicator or U indicator is lit in green If it is not lit in green refer to the User Guide on the Panasonic Web site gt see Introduction You cannot make a call while the base unit is downloading the firmware update Wait until the STATUS indicator or L indicator stops flashing and changes to steady green The handset is too far from the base unit Move closer and try again Check the VoIP status in the Web user interface and confirm that each line is registered properly gt see To check the setting status in the Web user interface in this section Check that the SIP server add
208. ne 8 No Answer Phone Number Description Specifies the phone number of the destination to forward calls to when a call is not answered after it has rung a specified number of times Note e Ifyou change this setting when Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward is set to Yes the change to this setting is not immediately applied on this screen In this case reload the screen to confirm that the change is applied Value Range Max 24 characters Note You cannot leave this field empty if No Answer Enable Call Forward is set to Yes Default Value Not stored No Answer Ring Count Description Specifies the number of times that an incoming call rings until the call is forwarded Note e Ifyou change this setting when Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward is set to Yes the change to this setting is not immediately applied on this screen In this case reload the screen to confirm that the change is applied Value Range 0 2 20 0 No ring Default Value 3 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 111 3 7 4 Tone Settings 3 7 4 Tone Settings This screen allows you to configure the dual tone frequencies and ring tone patterns of each tone Panasonic Web Port Close Telephone Line 4 Ces Tone Timings SE Tone Frequencies Line amp Tone Timings Tone settings Import Phonebook Stutter Tone Exp
209. net Port Settings Configuration File Reference VLAN_ID_IP_PHONE KX TGP550 only Page 155 IP Phone Priority KX TGP550 only Description Selects the priority number for the unit Value Range 0 7 Default Value 7 Phone User Interface Reference 2 1 3 VLAN Settings KX TGP550 only Page 35 Configuration File Reference VLAN_PRI_IP_PHONE KX TGP550 only Page 155 PC VLAN ID KX TGP550 only Description Specifies the VLAN ID for the PC Value Range 1 4094 Default Value 1 Phone User Interface Reference 2 1 3 VLAN Settings KX TGP550 only Page 35 Configuration File Reference VLAN_ID_PC KX TGP550 only Page 156 PC Priority KX TGP550 only Description Selects the priority number for the PC Value Range 0 7 Default Value 0 Phone User Interface Reference 2 1 3 VLAN Settings KX TGP550 only Page 35 Configuration File Reference VLAN_PRI_PC KX TGP550 only Page 156 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 67 3 4 3 HTTP Client Settings 3 4 3 HTTP Client Settings This screen allows you to change the HTTP client settings for the unit in order to access the HTTP server of your phone system and download configuration files Panasonic KX TGP550T04 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance HTTP Client Settings Web Port Close Network HTTP Client
210. nsmissions of SIP messages For details refer to RFC 3261 Value Range e 2 e 4 e 8 e 16 e 32 Default Value 4 Web User Interface Reference T2 Timer Page 88 INVITE_RTXN_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example INVITE_RTXN_1 INVITE_RTXN_2 INVITE_RTXN_8 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the number of times that INVITE requests are retransmitted when no reply is received from the server Value Range 1 6 Default Value 6 Web User Interface Reference INVITE Retry Count Page 88 OTHER_RTXN_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example OTHER_RTXN_1 OTHER _RTXN_ 2 OTHER_RTXN_8 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the number of times that non INVITE requests general SIP messages are retransmitted when no reply is received from the server Value Range 1 10 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 185 4 7 2 SIP Settings Default Value 10 Web User Interface Reference Non INVITE Retry Count Page 88 SIP_FOVR_NORSP_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example SIP_FOVR_NORSP_1 SIP_FOVR_NORSP_2 SIP_FOVR_NORSP_8 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to perform the fail over process when the unit detects that the SIP server is not replying to SIP message Value Range e Y Enable fail over N Disable fail over Note If set to Y the unit will try
211. nt For details see Access Levels IDs and Passwords in 3 2 1 Before Accessing the Web User Interface Notice You should manage the passwords carefully and change them regularly 1 1 7 2 Changing the Language for Web User Interface Programming When accessing the unit via the Web user interface on a PC connected to the same network various menus and settings are displayed You can change the language used for displaying these setting items Because the language setting for the Web user interface is not synchronized with those of the base unit or handsets you must set the languages for each independently The available languages may differ depending on the country area of use For details see 3 5 1 Web Language Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 27 1 1 10 Other Network Settings 1 1 8 Phone User Interface Programming You can change the settings directly from the unit For details about the operations refer to the User Guide on the Panasonic Web site gt see Introduction For details about additional features available with direct commands see Section 2 Phone User Interface Programming 1 1 8 1 Changing the Language for Phone User Interface Programming You can change the language used on the LCD Because the language settings for the LCD of the base unit and handsets are not synchronized you must set the languages individually for the base unit and each handset The available languages may differ depending
212. nterface see 3 4 2 1 Link Speed Duplex Mode 34 Administrator Guide If your phone system dealer does not allow you these settings you cannot change them even though the unit shows the setting menu Document Version 2 1 3 VLAN Settings KX TGP550 only To set the link speed and duplex mode In cases when buttons soft key icons are shown in English alphabet 1 Base unit MENU middle soft key 5 3 0 Handset MENU center of joystick gt 5 3 0 e For KX TGP500 users go to step 4 V a Select Speed Duplex gt SELECT V a Select LAN port or PC port gt SELECT V 4 Select the desired option gt SAVE Base unit EXIT Handset OFF ae Set In cases when buttons soft key icons are shown in symbols pictures 1 Base unit middle soft key 5 3 0 Handset center of joystick gt 5 3 0 For KX TGP500 users go to step 4 V a Select Speed Duplex gt RIA V a Select LAN port or PC port gt U Y 4 Select the desired option gt BL Base unit G Handset A oP eh Note e After you have finished configuring the settings the base unit will restart automatically once the base unit or handset returns to idle e For KX TGP500 users only the LAN port setting is available because the unit does not have a PC port 2 1 3 VLAN Settings KX TGP550 only You can change the VLAN settings for the unit and for the PC The d
213. number that does not match the dial format in Dial Plan e If you select No the call will be made only if the user dials a phone number that matches the dial format in Dial Plan Note e For details about configuring these settings by configuration file programming see DIAL PLAN 1 8 and DIAL_PLAN NOT MATCH ENABLE 1 8 in 4 7 1 Call Control Settings Available Values for the Dial Plan Field The following table explains which characters you can use in the dial format and what the characters mean Element Available Value Description String L lt gt You can enter dial plan descriptions using a combination of 9 S X X the characters listed as available values 9 x wt Example 123 If the dialed phone number is 123 the call is made immediately plop Digit Wildcard X X Example 12xxxxx If the dialed phone number is 12 followed by any 5 digit number the call is made immediately Range Example 123 If the dialed phone number is either one of 1 2 or 3 the call is made immediately Subrange Example 1 5 If the dialed phone number is 1 2 3 4 or 5 the call is made immediately A subrange is only valid for single digit numbers For example 4 9 is valid but 12 21 is invalid Repeat Example 1 If the dialed phone number is 1 followed by zero or more 1 s e g 11 111 the call is made
214. of the third value and then stop it for the duration of the last value The whole sequence will then repeat For example if the value for this setting is 100 100 0 0 the unit will play the tone for 100 ms stop it for 100 ms and then play it continuously Default Value 0 0 0 0 The unit plays the dial tone continuously Configuration File Reference DIAL_TONE_TIMING Page 163 3 7 4 2 Busy Tone Tone Frequencies Description Specifies the dual tone frequencies in hertz of busy tones using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma Value Range 0 200 1000 0 No tone Default Value 480 620 Configuration File Reference BUSY_TONE_FRQ Page 163 Tone Timings Description Specifies the pattern in milliseconds of busy tones using 4 whole numbers on 1 off 1 on 2 off 2 separated by commas Value Range 0 5000 0 Infinite time Default Value 500 500 500 500 Configuration File Reference BUSY_TONE_TIMING Page 163 3 7 4 3 Ringing Tone Tone Frequencies Description Specifies the dual tone frequencies in hertz of ringback tones using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma Value Range 0 200 1000 0 No tone Default Value 440 480 Configuration File Reference RINGING_TONE_FRQ Page 164 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 113 3 7 4 Tone Settings Tone Timings De
215. of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1987 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1987 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1988 Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1988 Stephen Deering Copyright c 1988 University of Utah d Copyright c 1988 1989 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1988 1991 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1988 1992 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1988 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1989 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1989 1991 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1989 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1989 1993 1994 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1990 1991 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1990 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1991 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1991 1993 1994 Th
216. of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1982 1986 1991 1993 1994 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1982 1986 1991 1993 1995 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1982 1986 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1982 1986 1993 1994 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1982 1986 1993 1994 1995 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1982 1986 1993 1995 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1982 1988 1991 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1983 1990 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1983 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1985 1986 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1985 1986 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1986 1989 1991 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved 236 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 Copyright c 1986 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1987 1991 1993 The Regents of the University
217. oft key icons are shown in symbols pictures 1 Base unit middle soft key gt 5 0 0 Handset center of joystick gt 5 0 0 V 4 Select On for DHCP gt I Y 4 Select Automatic for DNS gt I e Select Manual to enter the addresses for DNS1 primary DNS server and if necessary DNS2 secondary DNS server manually gt OK Base unit G Handset A To configure network settings manually In cases when buttons soft key icons are shown in English alphabet 1 2 3 Base unit MENU middle soft key gt 5 0 0 Handset MENU center of joystick gt 5 0 0 V a Select off for DHCP SAVE Base unit EXIT Handset OFF Base unit MENU middle soft key gt 5 0 1 Handset MENU center of joystick gt 5 0 1 V 4 Enter the IP address subnet mask default gateway DNS1 primary DNS server and if necessary DNS2 secondary DNS server gt SAVE Base unit EXIT Handset OFF In cases when buttons soft key icons are shown in symbols pictures 1 Base unit middle soft key gt 5 0 0 Handset center of joystick 5 0 0 V 4 Select o for DHCP gt I Base unit lt gt Handset A Base unit middle soft key gt 5 0 1 Handset center of joystick gt 5 0 1 V 4 Enter the IP address subnet mask default gateway DNS1 primary DNS server and if necessary
218. omma separated Integer Description Specifies the pattern in milliseconds of howler tones i e alarm tones using 4 whole numbers on 1 off 1 on 2 off 2 separated by commas Value Range 0 5000 0 Infinite time Default Value 100 100 100 100 Web User Interface Reference Tone Timings Page 115 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 165 4 5 2 Tone Settings HOWLER_START_TIME Value Format Integer Description Specifies the length of time in seconds that busy or reorder tones play until they switch to howler tones Value Range 0 120 0 Disable Default Value 30 Web User Interface Reference Start Time Page 115 BELL_CORE_PATTERN1_ TIMING Value Format Comma separated Integer Description Specifies the cadence in milliseconds of pattern ID 1 described in the LSSGR GR 506 CORE Signaling for Analog Interfaces section 14 using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma Value Range 0 5000 0 Infinite time Default Value 2000 4000 BELL_CORE_PATTERN2_TIMING Value Format Comma separated Integer Description Specifies the cadence in milliseconds of pattern ID 2 described in the LSSGR GR 506 CORE Signaling for Analog Interfaces section 14 using 4 whole numbers separated by commas Value Range 0 5000 0 Infinite time Default Value 800 400 800 4000 BELL_CORE_PATTERN3_
219. onic_ MODEL fwver mac Configuration File Reference HTTP_USER_AGENT Page 157 3 4 3 2 Proxy Server Settings Enable Proxy Description Selects whether to use the proxy server Value Range e Yes e No Default Value No Proxy Server Address Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the proxy server Value Range Max 127 characters Note e You cannot leave this field empty if Enable Proxy is set to Yes Default Value Not stored Proxy Server Port Description Specifies the port number of the proxy server Value Range 1 65535 Default Value 8080 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 69 3 4 4 Global Address Detection 3 4 4 Global Address Detection This screen allows you to configure the Global Address Detection feature and STUN server settings The global IP address of the network the unit is connected to will be detected periodically If the global IP address has changed the new address will be registered to the SIP server Note If the unit is connected directly to the Internet or the network global address is static i e does not change you do not need to configure Global Address Detection Panasonic KX TGP550T04 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance Global Address Detection Web Port Close Network Global Address Detection Detection Method STUN SIP SE second s 10 65535 0 Disable H
220. ons of the network router or the network to be used 1 1 6 3 Configuration File This section gives concrete examples of the functions of the configuration file and how to manage it The configuration file is a text file that contains the various settings that are necessary for operating the unit The files are normally stored on a server maintained by your phone system dealer and will be downloaded to the units as required All configurable settings can be specified in the configuration file You can ignore settings that already have the desired values Only change parameters as necessary For details about setting parameters and their descriptions see Section 4 Configuration File Programming and Section 8 Configuration File Examples Using 3 Types of Configuration Files The unit can download up to 3 configuration files One way to take advantage of this is by classifying the configuration files into the following 3 types Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 21 1 1 6 Provisioning Type Usage Master configuration file Configure settings that are common to all units such as the SIP server address and the IP addresses of the DNS and NTP Network Time Protocol servers managed by your phone system dealer This configuration file is used by all the units Example of the configuration file s URL http prov example com Panasonic Configcommon cfg Product configuration file Configure settings that are
221. option tag 100rel will be added to the Supported header of the INVITE message and to the Require header of the 1xx provisional message If setto N the option tag 100rel will not be used Default Value N Web User Interface Reference Supports 100rel RFC 3262 Page 89 Parameter Name Example SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_1 SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_2 SIP_18X_RTX_INTVL_8 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the retransmission interval in seconds for 18x responses Value Range 0 1 600 0 Disable Default Value 0 SIP_PRSNC_ADDR 1 8 188 Parameter Name Example SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_1 SIP_PRSNC_ADDR 2 SIP_PRSNC_ADDR_8 Value Format String Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP presence server Value Range Max 127 characters IP address in dotted decimal notation or FQDN Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Presence Server Address Page 84 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 4 7 2 SIP Settings SIP_PRSNC_PORT _ 1 8 Parameter Name Example SIP_PRSNC_PORT_1 SIP_PRSNC_PORT_2 SIP_PRSNC_PORT_8 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP presence server Value Range 1 65535 Default Value 5060 Web User Interface Reference Presence Server Port Page 84
222. or Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 4 6 2 RTP Settings Value Range 0 255 Note e Because the 6 bit DSCP values i e xxx 000 where x 0 or 1 in the DS field are converted to the 8 bit DSCP values i e xxx 000 00 you must specify here the fourfold decimal value for 2 bits shifted left The following listing shows the DSCP level of DiffServ and the corresponding decimal value to be specified in this parameter Best Effort default 000 000 00 0 AF11 DSCP 10 001 010 00 S AF12 DSCP 12 001 100 00 4 AF13 DSCP 14 001 110 00 5 AF21 DSCP 18 010 010 00 2 AF22 DSCP 20 010 100 00 80 AF23 DSCP 22 010 110 00 88 AF31 DSCP 26 011 010 00 104 AF32 DSCP 28 011 100 00 Ki AF33 DSCP 30 011 110 00 12 AF41 DSCP 34 100 010 00 13 AF42 DSCP 36 100 100 00 144 AF43 DSCP 38 100 110 00 15 CS1 ToS 1 001 000 00 32 CS2 ToS 2 010 000 00 64 CS3 ToS 3 011 000 00 96 CS4 ToS 4 100 000 00 128 u III u CS5 ToS 5 101 000 00 160 CS6 ToS 6 110 000 00 192 CS7 ToS 7 111 000 00 224 EF Expedited Forwarding DSCP 46 101 110 00 184 Default Value 0 Web User Interface Reference RTP Packet QoS DSCP Page 93 RTCP_INTVL_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example RTCP_INTVL_1 RTCP_INTVL_2 RTCP_INTVL_8 Value Format
223. or Guide 163 4 5 2 Tone Settings Web User Interface Reference Tone Timings Page 113 RINGING_TONE_FRQ Value Format Comma separated Integer Description Specifies the dual tone frequencies in hertz of ringback tones using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma Value Range 0 200 1000 0 No tone Default Value 440 480 Web User Interface Reference Tone Frequencies Page 113 RINGING_TONE_TIMING Value Format Comma separated Integer Description Specifies the pattern in milliseconds of ringback tones using 4 whole numbers on 1 off 1 on 2 off 2 separated by commas Value Range 0 5000 0 Infinite time Default Value 2000 4000 2000 4000 Web User Interface Reference Tone Timings Page 114 STT_TONE_FRQ Value Format Comma separated Integer Description Specifies the dual tone frequencies in hertz of stutter dial tones to notify that a voice mail is waiting using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma Value Range 0 200 1000 0 No tone Default Value 350 440 Web User Interface Reference Tone Frequencies Page 114 STT_TONE_TIMING 164 Value Format Comma separated Integer Description Specifies the pattern in milliseconds of stutter dial tones to notify that a voice mail is waiting using 22 whole numbers on 1 off 1 on 2 off 2 0n 11 o
224. ord for both the User and Administrator accounts gt see 3 5 2 Administrator Password The password can consist of 6 to 16 ASCII characters case sensitive gt see Entering Characters in 3 2 2 Accessing the Web User Interface Notice Only one account can be logged in to the Web user interface at a time If you try to access the Web user interface while someone is logged in you will be denied access e You cannot log in to the Web user interface even under the same account as someone who is already logged in The user password is required to change the settings e The IDs can be changed through configuration file programming gt see ADMIN_ID and USER_ID in 4 3 1 Login Account Settings You can reset the account IDs and passwords to their factory default settings by performing Reset Web ID Password from the base unit or one of the handsets For details see 2 1 6 Reset Web ID Password 3 2 2 Accessing the Web User Interface The unit can be configured from the Web user interface 50 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 2 2 Accessing the Web User Interface To access the Web user interface 1 Open your Web browser and then enter http followed by the unit s IP address into the address field of your browser Note To determine the unit s IP address perform the following operations on the base unit KX TGP550 only or handset In cases when buttons soft key icons ar
225. ork Settings 14 16 61 Basic Network Setup 14 Before Accessing the Web User Interface 48 BELL_CORE_PATTERN1_TIMING 166 BELL_CORE_PATTERN2_TIMING 166 BELL_CORE_PATTERN3_TIMING 166 BELL_CORE_PATTERN4_TIMING 166 BELL_CORE_PATTERN5_TIMING 167 Block Anonymous Call 107 Block Caller ID 107 Busy Enable Call Forward 109 Busy Phone Number 110 Busy Tone 113 BUSY_TONE_FRQ 163 BUSY_TONE_TIMING 163 C Call Control 101 102 104 Call Control Line 1 Line 8 104 Call Control Settings 128 130 161 175 207 Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Match 107 Call Features 107 Call Forward 106 108 109 110 177 Call Hold 95 174 Call Rejection Phone Numbers 103 Cancel Button 52 CFG_CYCLIC 148 CFG_CYCLIC_INTVL 149 CFG_FILE_KEY_LENGTH 148 CFG_FILE_KEY1 147 CFG_FILE_KEY2 148 CFG_FILE_KEY3 148 CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH 146 CFG_PRODUCT_FILE_PATH 145 CFG_RESYNC_FROM_SIP 150 CFG_RESYNC_TIME 149 CFG_ROOT_CERTIFICATE_PATH 158 CFG_RTRY_INTVL 149 CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH 144 Change Administrator Password 74 Change User Password 75 244 Administrator Guide Channel 1 3 72 Characters Available for String Values 134 Checking the Status ofthe Unit 222 Codec Settings 129 167 CODEC Settings 95 Codec Settings for G729A only 232 CODEC_G711_REQ 169 CODEC_G729_PARAM 169 Comprehensive Example 225 Conference Server Address 102 CONFERENCE_SERVER_ADDRESS 161 Configuration File 21 132 Configuration File Examples 223 Configuration File Parameter List
226. ort Phonebook R Tone Frequencies Tone Timings Tone Frequencies Tone Timings Tone Frequencies Tone Timings Start Time 3 7 4 1 Dial Tone Tone Frequencies KX TGP550T04 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance Tone Settings Multi Number Settings Tone Frequencies 350 440 Call Control ea Tone Timings 0 0 0 0 A Tone Frequencies 480 620 500 500 500 500 Line 6 Ringing Tone 440 480 2000 4000 2000 4000 350 440 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 1 480 620 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 Howler Tone 1400 2060 100 100 100 100 30 second s 0 120 E Description Specifies the dual tone frequencies in hertz of dial tones using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma Value Range 0 200 1000 0 No tone Note e Ifthe value for this setting is 350 440 the unit will use a mixed signal of a 350 Hz tone and a 440 Hz tone Default Value 350 440 Configuration File Reference DIAL_TONE_FRQ Page 162 Tone Timings Description Specifies the pattern in milliseconds of dial tones using 4 whole numbers on 1 off 1 on 2 off 2 separated by commas 112 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 7 4 Tone Settings Value Range 0 5000 0 Infinite time Note s The unit will play the tone for the duration of the first value stop it for the duration of the second value play it for the duration
227. ou do not need to specify the port number If mac is included in this URL it will be replaced with the unit s MAC address in lower case s If MAC is included in this URL it will be replaced with the unit s MAC address in upper case e If MODEL is included in this URL it will be replaced with the unit s model name s H fwver is included in this URL it will be replaced with the unit s firmware version e If this URL ends with slash sip cfg is automatically added at the end of the URL For example CFG_MASTER_FILE_PATH http host dir becomes CFG MATER FILE PATH http host dir sip cfg Default Value Empty string Note e The URL specified by your phone system dealer may be preset in the unit Web User Interface Reference Master File URL Page 121 CFG_FILE_KEY1 Value Format String Description Specifies the encryption key password used to decrypt configuration files Note e Ifthe extension of the configuration file is e1c the configuration file will be decrypted using this key Value Range 32 byte characters Note e Ifan empty string is set for this parameter decryption with this value is disabled Default Value A unique value is preset to each unit Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 147 4 3 5 Provisioning Settings CFG_FILE_KEY2 Value Format String Description Sp
228. ovides an overview of the setup procedures for the unit Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 13 1 1 3 Basic Network Setup 1 1 Setup 1 1 1 Factory Defaults Many of the settings for this unit have been configured before the unit ships Where possible these settings are configured with the optimum or most common values for the setting For example the port number of the SIP Session Initiation Protocol server is set to 5060 However many of the settings such as the address of the SIP server or the phone number have not been pre configured and they must be modified depending on the usage environment If the port number of the SIP server is not 5060 the value of this setting must be changed This unit thus will not function properly using only the factory default settings The settings for each feature must be configured according to the environment in which the unit is used 1 1 2 Language Selection for the Unit You can change the language used on the LCD Because the language settings for the LCD of the base unit and handsets are not synchronized you must set the languages individually for the base unit and each handset In addition various settings can be configured by using the Web user interface on a PC connected on the same network gt see Section 3 Web User Interface Programming You can select the language for the Web user interface You must set the language setting for the Web user interface separ
229. ow The Web user interface window contains various controls for navigating and configuring settings The following figure shows the controls that are displayed on the Basic Network Settings screen as an example Panasonic KX TGP550T04 Maintenance Network VoIP Status System Telephone Basic Network Settings Web Port Close Connection Mode DHCP Static DHCP Settings Geste W Receive DNS server address automatically Use the following settings DNS1 DNS2 Domain Name Server Static IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway DNS1 DNS2 EE e The screen shots shown are taken from the Web user interface of the KX TGP550T04 so the model name may differ from that shown on your PC Actual default values may vary depending on your phone system dealer Tabs Tabs are the top categories for classifying settings When you click a tab the corresponding menu items and the configuration screen of the first menu item appear There are 6 tabs for the Administrator account and 4 tabs for the User account For details about the account types see Access Levels IDs and Passwords in this section Menu The menu displays the sub categories of the selected tab Configuration Screen Clicking a menu displays the corresponding configuration screen which contains the actual settings grouped into sections For details see 3 3 Status to 3 8 5 Restart Buttons The following standa
230. ows an example of using 2 types of configuration files a master configuration file to configure settings common to all units and product configuration files to configure settings common to particular groups Using Product Configuration Files According to the Position Groups You can use product configuration files for different groups or for multiple users within the same group Department Name URL of Product Configuration File Sales http prov example com Panasonic ConfigSales cfg Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 1 1 6 Provisioning Department Name URL of Product Configuration File Planning http prov example com Panasonic ConfigPlanning cfg 1 1 6 4 Downloading Configuration Files A unit downloads configuration files when it starts up at regular intervals and when directed to do so by the server In addition you can prohibit units from downloading the configuration files For details about the settings see 3 8 3 Provisioning Maintenance and 4 3 5 Provisioning Settings Download Timing Explanation Startup The configuration files are downloaded when the unit starts up At regular intervals The configuration files are downloaded periodically under the following conditions In the configuration file Add the line CFG_CYCLIC Y Set an interval minutes by specifying CFG _CYCLIC_INTVL In the Web user interface Click the Main
231. phonebook data file and click Open x Open go YIT Desktop phonebook Organize v Views H EI Documents HE Desktop E Recent Places j Computer E Pictures B Music NR Recently Changed B Searches I Public Folders es Search DI BB New Folder Name Date modified Type Size phonebook tsv a File name phonebook tsv Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 203 5 2 2 Editing with Microsoft Excel 4 On the Text Import Wizard Step 1 of 3 window click Next Text Import Wizard Step 1 of 3 Lg Iess The Text Wizard has determined that your data is Delimited If this is correct choose Next or choose the data type that best describes your data Original data type Choose the file type that best describes your data Delimited Characters such as commas or tabs separate each field Fixed width Fields are aligned in columns with spaces between each field Start import at row 1 File origin Windows ANSI D Preview of file D Users YIT Desktop phonebook phonebook tsv 1faron MacDowel01234001 a 2 Barbara Nicolls01234002 3farl O Brien01234003 5 4 Dorothy Parker01234004 Note e Regardless of what is selected for File origin the file will be processed normally if the format is appropriate 5 On the Text Import Wizard Step 2 of 3 window select Tab for Delimiters and then click Next
232. r File URL Cyclic Auto Resync Resync Interval Event Header Value for Resync Provisioning Maintenance Yes No Yes No 10080 minute s 1 40320 check sync Save Cancel 3 8 3 1 Provisioning Maintenance Enable Provisioning Description Selects whether the unit is automatically configured by downloading the configuration files from the provisioning server of your phone system Value Range e Yes es No Default Value Yes Configuration File Reference PROVISION_ENABLE Page 144 120 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 8 3 Provisioning Maintenance Standard File URL Description Specifies the URL of the standard configuration file which is used when every unit needs different settings Note s When you change this setting set Enable Provisioning to Yes at the same time Value Range Max 255 characters Default Value Not stored Note e The URL specified by your phone system dealer may be preset in the unit Configuration File Reference CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH Page 144 Product File URL Description Specifies the URL of the product configuration file which is used when all units with the same model number need the same settings Note When you change this setting set Enable Provisioning to Yes at the same time Value Range Max 255 characters Default Value Not stored Not
233. r Settings 37 TFTP Server 17 19 143 Third CODEC 96 Time 80 81 Time Adjust Settings 77 128 158 Time Server 78 Time Zone 78 TIME_QUERY_INTVL 159 TIME_SYNC_INTVL 159 TIME_ZONE 136 Timer Settings 87 Tone Frequencies 112 113 114 115 Tone Settings 112 129 162 Tone Timings 112 113 114 115 TOS_RTP_ 1 8 170 TOS_SIP_ 1 8 181 Trademarks 2 Transport Protocol 82 Transport Protocol for SIP 82 Troubleshooting 215 TSV Tab separated Value 116 117 201 203 U Unconditional Enable Call Forward 108 Unconditional Phone Number 109 Unique ID of Shared Call 106 Update Firmware Button 119 213 Update Type 118 USE_DEL_REG_CLOSE_ 1 8 190 USE_DEL_REG_OPEN_ 1 8 189 USER_DNS1_ADDR 153 USER_DNS2_ADDR 153 USER_ID 135 USER_PASS 135 Using 2 Types of Configuration Files 22 Using 3 Types of Configuration Files 21 V Version Information 57 VLAN setting 35 VLAN Settings 66 VLAN_ENABLE 155 VLAN_ID_IP_PHONE 155 VLAN_ID_PC 156 248 Administrator Guide VLAN_PRI_IP_PHONE 155 VLAN_PRI_PC 156 VM_NUMBER 1 8 175 VM_SUBSCRIBE_ENABLE 162 Voice Mail Access Number 105 VoIP 43 VoIP Settings 91 92 129 167 VoIP Settings Line 1 Line 8 92 VoIP Status 60 61 222 VoIP Tab 43 81 W Web Language 27 73 Web Port 48 52 76 Web Port Close Button 49 51 52 Web Server Port 76 Web Server Settings 76 Web User Interface Programming 17 27 39 Web User Interface Setting List 40 Web User Interface Windo
234. r to use for communication with the SIP proxy server Value Range 1 65535 Default Value 5060 Configuration File Reference SIP_PRXY_PORT_ 1 8 Page 180 Presence Server Address Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP presence server Value Range Max 127 characters Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference SIP_PRSNC_ADDR 1 8 Page 188 Presence Server Port Description Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP presence server 84 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 6 2 SIP Settings Line 1 Line 8 Value Range 1 65535 Default Value 5060 Configuration File Reference SIP_PRSNC_PORT_ 1 8 Page 189 3 6 2 3 Outbound Proxy Server Outbound Proxy Server Address Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP outbound proxy server Value Range Max 127 characters Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference SIP_OUTPROXY_ADDR 1 8 Page 193 Outbound Proxy Server Port Description Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP outbound proxy server Value Range 1 65535 Default Value 5060 Configuration File Reference SIP_OUTPROXY_PORT_ 1 8 Page 193 3 6 2 4 SIP Service Domain Service Domain Description Specifies the
235. ramming urssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 34 2 1 1 Phone User Interface Feature List and Direct Commands 444444444HHHHnnn nennen 34 2 1 2 Speed Duplex Settings cccccccccccccecccceeccceccceeeeeeceeaeeeaaeeaaaeaaaeeaaaeseeaeeeqeeseeesseeeeeeeseeesees 34 2 1 3 VLAN Settings KX TGP550 ONIY unnenan ae nal 35 2 1 4 LS en ee een 36 2 1 5 Terminal Number Settings E 37 2 1 6 Reset Web DP ASS WEE 38 3 Web User Interface Programming 444444 0n0nnnnnnen nun ann nennen 39 3 1 Web User Interface Setting List anne 40 3 2 Programming InStruchons san 48 3 2 1 Before Accessing the Web User Interface uursumm4nnnnnnnnnnnn nn ann nn nn nn nn 48 3 2 2 Accessing the Web User Interface 2 4400 22000 unse ennnnennnnans ran 50 3 3 ETH near ee ee E 56 3 3 1 SEITEN DEE EE 57 3 3 1 1 Version WAPOA Eau ee 57 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 3 Table of Contents 4 le e RE 57 Operating TE 57 IPL Versio WEE 57 Firmware Version ME 57 3 3 2 Network Status ccccccccccccccccceccceeccuueceueeceuueceuueceuaeceuuueeuueceueceeuuueeuaeeeuaueeuaessuausuuaeeuaansuuaes 58 3 3 2 1 Network Stat s 2 s 0 ieee ee ee ene cease ce 58 ee 58 Ethernet Link Status LAN Port sea ee 58 Ethernet Link Status PC Port KX TGP550 only 58 Gonnecti n Modez 2 22 coc Hoon Hesse EE EENS e 59 IP ele e 59 SUBNEUMASK sess
236. ramming gt see SYNCHRONIZATION ENABLE 1 8 in 4 7 1 Call Control Settings e Ifyou change this setting when Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward is set to Yes the change to this setting is not immediately applied on this screen In this case reload the screen to confirm that the change is applied Value Range e Yes e No Default Value No Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 7 3 Call Control Line 1 Line 8 Unconditional Phone Number Description Specifies the phone number of the destination to forward all incoming calls to Note e Ifyou change this setting when Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward is set to Yes the change to this setting is not immediately applied on this screen In this case reload the screen to confirm that the change is applied Value Range Max 24 characters Note e You cannot leave this field empty if Unconditional Enable Call Forward is set to Yes Default Value Not stored Busy Enable Call Forward Description Selects whether to forward incoming calls to a specified destination when the line is in use Note e If Do Not Disturb has been enabled on the server the server rejects incoming calls and the unit does not receive any calls even if you have selected Yes for this setting e Ifyou have selected Yes for this setting and Call Forward has been enabled on the server b
237. ransferring configuration files securely between the unit and the server Which method is used depends on the environment and equipment available from the phone system Method 1 Transferring Encrypted Configuration Files Unencrypted a Encrypted configuration configuration file file CFG FILE KEY1 CFG_FILE KEY1 To use this method an encryption key is required to encrypt and decrypt the configuration files A preset encryption key unique to each unit an encryption key set by your phone system dealer etc is used for the encryption When the unit downloads an encrypted configuration file it will decrypt the file using the same encryption key and then configure the settings automatically Method 2 Transferring Configuration Files Using HTTPS This method uses SSL which is commonly used on the Internet to transfer configuration files between the unit and server For more secure communication you can use a root certificate Notice To avoid redundant data transfer over the network important data such as the encryption key used to encrypt the configuration files and the root certificate for SSL should be configured through pre provisioning as much as possible e Itis recommended that you encrypt the data in order to keep the communication secure when transferring configuration files However if you are using the units within a secure environment such as within an intranet it is not necessary to encrypt the data Document
238. rd buttons are displayed in the Web user interface Button Function Web Port Close Closes the Web port ofthe unit and logs you out ofthe Web user interface after a confirmation message is displayed Save Applies changes and displays a result message see Result Messages in this section Cancel Discards changes The settings on the current screen will return to the values they had before being changed 52 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 2 2 Accessing the Web User Interface Button Function Refresh Updates the status information displayed on the screen This button is displayed in the upper right area of the Network Status and VoIP Status screens Entering Characters In the Web user interface when specifying a name message password or other text item you can enter any of the ASCII characters displayed in the following table with a white background However there are additional limitations for certain types of fields as follows Number field You may only enter a sequence of numeric characters You cannot leave the field empty IP Address field You can enter the IP address using dotted decimal notation i e n n n n where n 0 255 You cannot enter invalid IP addresses for example 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 or 127 0 0 1 FQDN field The field cannot contai
239. receives priority 1 1 10 Other Network Settings 1 1 10 1 Firewall and Router Setup When the unit is connected to a network that is protected by a firewall and or router you need to configure the firewall and or router so that they do not block communication from the IP address and port number used by the unit 28 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 1 1 10 Other Network Settings 1 1 10 2 NAT Network Address Translation Setup This section provides information about configuring a router that uses NAT Internet Global IP address XXX YVY 2ZZ 127 PC SIP Cordless Phone Private IP address Private IP address 192 168 228 111 192 168 228 12 If the unit is connected to a network that uses a NAT router and a private IP address is assigned to each terminal on the network depending on your phone system s setup you might need to configure the unit and router so as to use NAT Traversal techniques If your phone system dealer provides an outbound proxy service that supports NAT Traversal you need only to set the IP address of the SIP outbound proxy server to the unit no other settings are necessary However depending on the phone system of the outbound proxy service no setting may be necessary because private IP addresses are automatically translated into global IP addresses by the outbound proxy server For details about the outbound proxy service consult your phone system dealer When TCP is used to transpor
240. ress URLs of the configuration files encryption key and other required settings are correct Check the firewall and port forwarding settings on the router gt see 1 1 10 Other Network Settings Check Multi Number Settings in the Telephone tab in the Web user interface gt see 3 7 1 Multi Number Settings If 3 calls are being handled by the base unit and or handsets simultaneously a new call cannot be made from the unit For details about settings consult your network administrator or phone system dealer Password for Web User Interface Prog ramming Problem Cause Solution have lost the login password of the Web user interface for the Administrator or User account Reset the password from the base unit or one of the handsets The passwords for both Administrator and User will be reset gt see 2 1 6 Reset Web ID Password For security reasons it is recommended that the passwords are set again immediately gt see 3 5 2 Administrator Password or 3 5 3 Change User Password Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 221 7 1 Troubleshooting Time Problem Cause Solution The time is not correct Adjust the date and time of the unit For details about the operations refer to the User Guide on the Panasonic Web site gt see Introduction s In the Web user interface you can set NTP synchronization and DST Summer Time control to adjust the time auto
241. s Page 78 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 4 4 6 STUN Settings TIME_SYNC_INTVL Value Format Integer Description Specifies the interval in seconds to resynchronize after having detected no reply from the NTP server Value Range 10 86400 Default Value 60 TIME_QUERY_INTVL Value Format Integer Description Specifies the interval in seconds between synchronizations with the NTP server Value Range 10 86400 Default Value 43200 Web User Interface Reference Synchronization Interval Page 77 4 4 6 STUN Settings STUN_SERV_ADDR Value Format String Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the STUN server Value Range Max 127 characters IP address in dotted decimal notation or FQDN Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference STUN Server Address Page 70 STUN_SERV_PORT Value Format Integer Description Specifies the port number of the STUN server Value Range 1 65535 Default Value 3478 Web User Interface Reference STUN Server Port Page 71 STUN_2NDSERV_ADDR Value Format String Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 159 4 4 7 Miscellaneous Network Settings Description Specifies the IP address of the secondary STUN server Note e This setting is available only when STUN_SERV_ADDR is speci
242. s listed System Settings Category Parameter Name Ref Login Account Settings ADMIN_ID Page 134 ADMIN Pass Page 135 USER_ID Page 135 USER_PASS Page 135 System Time Settings TIME ZONE Page 136 DST_ENABLE Page 136 DST_OFFSET Page 136 DST_START_MONTH Page 137 DST_START_ORDINAL_ DAY Page 137 DST_START_DAY_OF WEEK Page 137 DST_START_TIME Page 138 DST_STOP_MONTH Page 138 DST_STOP_ORDINAL DAY Page 138 DST_STOP_DAY_OF_ WEEK Page 139 DST_STOP_TIME Page 139 Syslog Settings SYSLOG EVENT SIP Page 139 SYSLOG _EVENT_CFG Page 140 SYSLOG EVENT VOIP Page 140 SYSLOG _EVENT_TEL Page 140 SYSLOG _ADDR Page 141 SYSLOG_PORT Page 141 SYSLOG_RTPSMLY_INTVL_ 1 8 Page 141 Firmware Update Settings FIRM UPGRADE ENABLE Page 141 FIRM_VER_EUDECT Page 142 FIRM_VER_USDECT Page 142 FIRM_UPGRADE AUTO Page 142 FIRM FILE PATH Page 143 126 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 4 1 Configuration File Parameter List Category Parameter Name Ref Provisioning Settings OPTION66 ENABLE Page 143 PROVISION ENABLE Page 144 CFG_STANDARD FILE PATH Page 144 CFG_PRODUCT FILE PATH Page 145 CFG_MASTER FILE PATH Page 146 CFG_FILE KEY1 Page 147 CFG_FILE KEY2 Page 148 CFG_FILE KEY3 Page 148 CFG_FILE KEY LENGTH Page 148
243. scription Specifies the pattern in milliseconds of ringback tones using 4 whole numbers on 1 off 1 on 2 off 2 separated by commas Value Range 0 5000 0 Infinite time Default Value 2000 4000 2000 4000 Configuration File Reference RINGING_TONE_TIMING Page 164 3 7 4 4 Stutter Tone Tone Frequencies Description Specifies the dual tone frequencies in hertz of stutter dial tones to notify that a voice mail is waiting using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma Value Range 0 200 1000 0 No tone Default Value 350 440 Configuration File Reference STT_TONE_FRQ Page 164 Tone Timings Description Specifies the pattern in milliseconds of stutter dial tones to notify that a voice mail is waiting using 22 whole numbers on 1 off 1 on 2 off 2 0n 11 off 11 separated by commas Value Range 0 5000 0 Infinite time Default Value 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 0 0 Configuration File Reference STT_TONE_TIMING Page 164 3 7 4 5 Reorder Tone Tone Frequencies 114 Description Specifies the dual tone frequencies in hertz of reorder tones using 2 whole numbers separated by a comma Value Range 0 200 1000 0 No tone Default Value 480 620 Configuration File Reference REORDER_TONE_FRQ Page 165 Administrator Gui
244. sed to access the SIP server Value Range Max 64 characters except amp lt gt and space Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Authentication Password Page 86 SIP_SRC_PORT 1 8 Parameter Name Example SIP_SRC_PORT_1 SIP_SRC_PORT_2 SIP_SRC_PORT_8 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the source port number used by the unit for SIP communication Value Range 1024 49151 Note s The SIP port number for each line must be unique Default Value 5060 for SIP_SRC_PORT_1 5070 for SIP_SRC_PORT_2 5080 for SIP_SRC_PORT_3 5090 for SIP_SRC_PORT_4 5100 for SIP_SRC_PORT_5 5110 for SIP_SRC_PORT_6 5120 for SIP_SRC_PORT_7 5130 for SIP_SRC_PORT_8 Web User Interface Reference Source Port Page 85 SIP_PRXY_ADDR_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example SIP_PRXY_ADDR_1 SIP_PRXY_ADDR_2 SIP_PRXY_ADDR_8 Value Format String Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP proxy server Value Range Max 127 characters IP address in dotted decimal notation or FQDN Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Proxy Server Address Page 84 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 179 4 7 2 SIP Settings SIP_PRXY_PORT_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example SIP_PRXY_PORT_1 SIP_PRXY_PORT_2 SIP_PRXY_PORT_8 Val
245. see 3 8 2 Local Firmware Update can be performed regardless of this setting Value Range e Yes es No Default Value Yes Configuration File Reference FIRM_UPGRADE_ENABLE Page 141 Update Type Description Selects whether to display a confirmation message asking the user to perform a firmware update manual or perform the firmware update without asking the user automatic when the unit detects a newer version of firmware Note This setting is available only when Enable Firmware Update is set to Yes Changing this setting may require restarting the unit 118 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 8 2 Local Firmware Update Value Range e Automatic e Manual Default Value Automatic Configuration File Reference FIRM_UPGRADE_AUTO Page 142 Firmware File URL Description Specifies the URL where the firmware file is stored Note This setting is available only when Enable Firmware Update is set to Yes Changing this setting may require restarting the unit Max 255 characters Value Range Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference FIRM_FILE_PATH Page 143 3 8 2 Local Firmware Update This screen allows you to manually update the unit s firmware from a PC by clicking Update Firmware Note e After the firmware has been successfully updated the base unit will restart automatically Panasonic KX
246. setting is available for that access level 2 This setting can also be configured through configuration file programming Telephone Access kl Menu Item Section Title Setting Side Ref U Multi Number Grouping Handset Line No v Page 99 Settings Handset selection for receiving calls Phone Number vi Page 99 Handset No v Page 100 Base v Page 100 Handset and Line No Handset No v Page 100 selection for making calls Base v Page 100 Line No v Page 100 Default v Page 101 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 45 3 1 Web User Interface Setting List 46 Access Menu Item Section Title Setting Level Ref U A Call Control Call Control Send SUBSCRIBE to Voice v Page 102 Mail Server Conference Server Address Page 102 Inter digit Timeout Page 102 Emergency Call Phone 1 5 Page 103 Numbers Call Rejection Phone 1 30 v v Page 103 Numbers Call Control Line Call Control Display Name v v Page 104 EWECH Enable Privacy Mode v Page 104 Voice Mail Access Number v Page 105 Enable Shared Call v Page 105 Unique ID of Shared Call v Page 106 Synchronize Do Not Disturb v Page 106 and Call Forward Dial Plan Dial Plan v Page 106 Call Even If Dial Plan Does Not Page 107 Match Call Features Block Caller ID v v Page 107 Block Anonymous Call Page 107 Do Not Disturb Page 108 Call Forward Un
247. sh Line No Phone Number VolP Status i SO mm Registered oO 2222222222 Registered oO 3333333333 Registered NO 4444444444 Registered NO 5555555555 Registered Ke 30 30 3 3 3 1 VolP Status Line No Description Indicates the line number 1 8 to which a phone number is assigned reference only Value Range Line 1 Line 8 Default Value Not applicable Phone Number Description Indicates the currently assigned phone numbers reference only Note e The corresponding field is blank if a line has not yet been leased or if the unit has not been configured Value Range Max 24 digits 60 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 4 1 Basic Network Settings Default Value Not applicable VoIP Status Description Indicates the current VoIP status of each line reference only Value Range Registered The unit has been registered to the SIP server and the line can be used Registering The unit is being registered to the SIP server and the line cannot be used e Blank The line has not been leased or the unit has not been configured yet Note e Immediately after starting up the unit the phone numbers of the lines will be displayed but the status of the line may not be displayed because the unit is still being registered to the SIP server To display the status wait about 30 to 60 seconds and then click Refresh to obtain updated status information
248. so be configured through configuration file programming This setting can also be configured through phone user interface programming System Access Menu Item Section Title Setting Level Ref U A Web Language Web Language Language v v Page 73 Administrator Change Administrator New Password v Page 74 Bar non BASS WON Confirm New Password v Page 74 Change User Change User Password New Password v v Page 75 pasawan Confirm New Password v v Page 75 Web Server Web Server Settings Web Server Port v Page 76 ru Port Close Timer v Page 76 42 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 1 Web User Interface Setting List Access 4 Menu Item Section Title Setting Level Ref U A Time Adjust Synchronization Enable Synchronization by ye v Page 77 Settings NTP Synchronization Interval vey v Page 77 Time Server NTP Server Address vo vw Page 78 Time Zone Time Zone ve vw Page 78 Daylight Saving Time Enable DST Enable Summer v v Page 78 Summer Time Time DST Offset Summer Time ve vw Page 78 Offset Start Day and Time of Month ve vw Page 79 DST Start Day and Time of Summer Time Day of Week e Page 79 Time ve vw Page 80 End Day and Time of Month ve vw Page 80 DST End Day and Time of Summer Time Day of Week vos vi Page 80 Time ve vw Page 81 1 The acce
249. ss levels are abbreviated as follows U User A Administrator A check mark indicates that the setting is available for that access level 2 This setting can also be configured through configuration file programming 7 If your phone system dealer does not allow you these settings you cannot change them even though the unit shows the setting menu Contact your phone system dealer for further information VoIP Access Menu Item Section Title Setting LEVEI Ref U A SIP Settings SIP Setting SIP User Agent v Page 82 Transport Protocol for Transport Protocol v Page 82 SIP Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 43 3 1 Web User Interface Setting List Access Menu Item Section Title Setting Level Ref U A SIP Settings Phone Number Phone Number v Page 83 I nga SIP Server Registrar Server Address v Page 83 Registrar Server Port v Page 84 Proxy Server Address y Page 84 Proxy Server Port v Page 84 Presence Server Address v Page 84 Presence Server Port v Page 84 Outbound Proxy Server Outbound Proxy Server v Page 85 Address Outbound Proxy Server Port v Page 85 SIP Service Domain Service Domain v Page 85 SIP Source Port Source Port v Page 85 SIP Authentication Authentication ID v Page 86 Authentication Password v Page 86 DNS Enable DNS SRV
250. sssennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 198 5 1 1 M lti Die ele E 198 5 2 Phonebook Import and Export eceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeneeeeeeneaeeeeeneeesneeseeesneeenes 199 5 2 1 Import Export Operation nn nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnn 202 5 2 2 Editing with Microsoft Excel E 203 5 2 3 Exporting Data from Microsoft Outlook an 205 5 3 Dial Plan E 205 5 3 1 REN Plan Settings san en een nee ae 206 6 Firmware Update nn tie 211 6 1 Firmware Server Setup WE 212 6 2 ele TEE e E 212 6 3 Executing Firmware Update ciistecsisessivcsidenetvenstuanctinceiievedwadadiobeds sedsaeabinseadesdideaddaseninicenn 213 6 4 Local Firmware Update i ciicccccsiccsecsisccstescscesensteeceteecsctesceiesescseneceseecarcestesnndeecssseeeeseeesi 213 7 Troubleshooting a ea 215 7 1 Troubleshooting a0 0a 216 8 Configuration File Examples ccccccceeceessssesseeeeeeeeeseeseeeeneeeeeeeees 223 8 1 Simplified Example of the Configuration File ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 224 8 2 Comprehensive Example of the Configuration File cccsecceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 225 8 2 1 Codec Settings for G729A EE 232 8 3 Example with Incorrect Descriptions sseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeanens 233 9 Open Source Software ee 235 112 23 i A E A TOERRURSSECRONE 243 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 Section 1 Initial Setup This section pr
251. t modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written 238 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 permission of the OpenSSL Project acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXP
252. t c 1980 1986 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1982 1985 1986 1988 1993 1994 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1982 1986 1988 1990 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1982 1986 1988 1990 1993 1994 1995 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1982 1986 1988 1990 1993 1995 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1982 1986 1988 1991 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1982 1986 1988 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1982 1986 1988 1993 1995 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1982 1986 1989 1991 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1982 1986 1989 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1982 1986 1990 1991 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1982 1986 1990 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1982 1986 1990 1993 1994 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1982 1986 1991 1993 The Regents
253. t jason thought net All rights reserved Copyright c 1999 2000 The NetBSD Foundation Inc All rights reserved Copyright c 1999 2000 2001 The NetBSD Foundation Inc All rights reserved Copyright c 1999 2001 The NetBSD Foundation Inc All rights reserved Copyright c 2000 The NetBSD Foundation Inc All rights reserved Copyright c 2000 2001 The NetBSD Foundation Inc All rights reserved Copyright c 2000 2001 2002 The NetBSD Foundation Inc All rights reserved Copyright c 2001 The NetBSD Foundation Inc All rights reserved Copyright c 2002 The NetBSD Foundation Inc All rights reserved Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 237 Copyright 1998 Massachusetts Institute of Technology All rights reserved Copyright 2001 Wasabi Systems Inc All rights reserved Portions Copyright c 1993 by Digital Equipment Corporation Portions Copyright c 1995 by International Business Machines Inc Copyright c 1983 1989 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1996 by Internet Software Consortium All rights reserved Copyright c 1980 1986 1989 Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1988 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1992 1993 The Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Copyright c 1994 Christopher G Demetriou All rights reserved Copyright c 19
254. t Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Display Name Page 104 INTERNATIONAL_ACCESS CODE Value Format String Description Specifies the number to be shown in the place of the first symbol when the phone number for incoming international calls contains Value Range Max 8 characters consisting of 0 9 and Note No other characters are allowed Default Value Empty string is deleted 196 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 Section 5 Useful Telephone Functions This section explains phone number settings for the base unit or handsets dial plan and phonebook import export function Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 197 5 1 1 Multi Number Settings 5 1 Line Settings for Base Unit and Handset 5 1 1 Multi Number Settings A unit can be used with a single base unit and 6 handsets You can assign a maximum of 8 different phone numbers for the base unit KX TGP550 only and handsets Each available phone number line can be assigned to the base unit and handsets as desired to handle incoming and outgoing calls Programming Example 1 The following programming example shows a configuration where the base unit and handsets have their own phone numbers and the base unit and handsets also share a common phone number You can program this table using Web user interface programming gt see 3 7 1 1 Grouping Handset Hands
255. t Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 181 4 7 2 SIP Settings Value Format Integer 182 Description Specifies the value to be stored in the ToS field in the IP header of SIP messages Note e The structures of the ToS DS field in an IP header are shown below ToS field 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Currently ra Precedence eie Type of Service gt unused 3bits 4bits 1bit DS field 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Currently tt DSCP unused 6bits 2 bits The ToS field consists of a 3 bit precedence a 4 bit type of service and a 1 bit unused field The DS filed consists of a 6 bit DSCP and a 2 bit unused field Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 4 7 2 SIP Settings Value Range 0 255 Note AF21 001 100 00 001 110 00 010 010 00 010 100 00 010 110 00 011 010 00 011 100 00 011 110 00 100 010 00 100 100 00 u III u CS5 ToS 5 101 000 00 CS6 ToS 6 110 000 00 CS7 ToS 7 111 000 00 224 EF Expedited Forwarding DSCP 46 101 110 00 184 60 92 4 5 8 8 1 112 120 136 144 152 e Because the 6 bit DSCP values i e xxx 000 where x 0 or 1 in the DS field are converted to the 8 bit DSCP values i e xxx 000 00 you must specify here the fourfold decimal value for 2 bits shifted left The following listing shows the DSCP level of Di
256. t the SIP messages you must always configure the devices for NAT Traversal To configure NAT Traversal you must have the following information e The global IP address of the router e The port numbers you will specify for Source Port and External RTP Port through the Web user interface so that you can configure the appropriate port forwarding settings Note e Because the IP address of the router needs to be set in the unit the IP address must be static SIP Setup It might be necessary to manually set the router s global IP address and reception port number in the unit In addition it might also be necessary to configure the port forwarding settings of the router so that packets sent from an outside network are sent to the unit These settings are required for each individual line For details about Web user interface programming see 3 4 5 Static NAPT Settings and 3 6 2 5 SIP Source Port Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 29 1 1 10 Other Network Settings To set the router s external global IP address and reception port number in the unit 1 In the Web user interface click the Network tab click Static NAPT Settings and then enter the router s global IP address in Global IP Address 2 Select Yes for Enable Global IP Address Usage per Line for each line e Select No to disable the setting for the line 3 Click the VoIP tab click SIP Settings Line 1 Line 8 and then enter the rout
257. t to send to the DHCP server Note e This setting is available only when CONNECTION_TYPE is set to 1 Value Range Max 63 characters Note An empty string is not allowed Default Value Model number example TGP5nn Web User Interface Reference Host Name Page 62 DHCP_DNS_ENABLE Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to receive DNS server addresses automatically or to assign a DNS server addresses up to 2 manually Note e This setting is available only when CONNECTION_TYPE is set to 1 and when NW_SETTING ENABLE is set to N Value Range e Y Use USER_DNS1_ADDR or USER _DNS1_ADDR and USER_DNS2_ADDR N Receive DNS server address automatically Default Value N Phone User Interface Reference Configuring Settings from the Base Unit KX TGP550 only Handset Page 15 Web User Interface Reference Domain Name Server Page 63 STATIC_IP_ADDRESS Value Format String Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 151 4 4 1 IP Settings Description Specifies the IP address for the unit Note e This setting is available only when CONNECTION_TYPE is set to 0 and when NW_SETTING ENABLE is set to N e When you specify this parameter you must specify STATIC SUBNET together in a configuration file Value Range IP address in dotted decimal notation Defau
258. tenance tab click Provisioning Maintenance and then select Yes for Cyclic Auto Resync Enter an interval minutes in Resync Interval Note The interval may be determined by your phone system dealer A maximum of 28 days 4 weeks can be set on the unit e If any valid value other than an empty string is specified for CFG_RESYNC_TIME in 4 3 5 Provisioning Settings in the configuration file the unit downloads the configuration files at the fixed time not at regular intervals When directed When a setting needs to be changed immediately units can be directed to download the configuration files by sending them a NOTIFY message that includes a special event from the SIP server e In the configuration file Specify the special event text in CFG _RESYNC_FROM_SIP s In the Web user interface Click the Maintenance tab click Provisioning Maintenance and then enter the special event text in Header Value for Resync Event Generally check sync or resync is set as the special event text Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 23 1 1 6 Provisioning Download Timing Explanation None prohibited If you want to prohibit units from changing their settings by downloading configuration files you can enable this function from the Web user interface The following operations will be prohibited Pre provisioning Provisioning at startup Provis
259. th HTTP 1 0 try changing the setting 0 Default Value 1 Web User Interface Reference HTTP Version Page 68 HTTP_USER_AGENT Value Format String Description Specifies the text string to send as the user agent in the header of HTTP requests Value Range Max 40 characters Note An empty string is not allowed If mac is included in this parameter it will be replaced with the unit s MAC address in lower case s If MAC is included in this parameter it will be replaced with the units MAC address in upper case If MODELY is included in this parameter it will be replaced with the unit s model name e H fwver is included in this parameter it will be replaced with the firmware version of the unit Default Value Panasonic_ MODEL fwver mac Web User Interface Reference HTTP User Agent Page 68 HTTP_SSL_VERIFY Value Format Integer Description Specifies whether to enable the verification of the root certificate Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 157 4 4 5 Time Adjust Settings Value Range 0 No verification of root certificate e 1 Simple verification of root certificate e 2 Precise verification of root certificate Note e If set to 0 the verification of the root certificate is disabled e If set to 1 the verification of the root certificate is enabled In
260. the North America model in FIRM_VER_USDECT Automatic Update e Ina configuration file add the line FIRM_UPGRADE_AUTO Y e In the Web user interface click the Maintenance tab click Firmware Maintenance and then select Automatic for Update Type Firmware Server URL e Ina configuration file specify the URL in FIRM_FILE_ PATH Inthe Web user interface click the Maintenance tab click Firmware Maintenance and then enter the URL in Firmware File URL Configuration Parameter Example 212 By setting the parameters as shown in the following example the unit will automatically download the firmware file from the specified URL http firm example com firm EUDECT01 05 fw and perform the update operation if the currently used firmware version is older than 01 05 Example FIRM_UPGRADE ENABLE Y FIRM_VER_EUDECT 01 05 FIRM_VER_USDECT not needed for EU DECT phone FIRM_UPGRADE AUTO Y FIRM FILE PATH http firm example com firm EUDECTO1 05 fw Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 6 4 Local Firmware Update 6 3 Executing Firmware Update After configuring the firmware update settings in the configuration file the firmware will be updated when the configuration file is downloaded The firmware update will be performed only when a newer version of the firmware file i e one that has a larger version number than the firmware currently used is specified in the downloaded configurat
261. the access levels For details about each setting see the reference pages listed Status Access Menu Item Section Title Setting Level Ref U A Version Version Information Model v v Page 57 DEER Operating BANK v v Page 57 IPL Version v v Page 57 Firmware Version v v Page 57 Network Status Network Status MAC Address v v Page 58 Ethernet Link Status LAN v v Page 58 Port Ethernet Link Status PC Port v v Page 58 Connection Mode v v Page 59 IP Address v v Page 59 Subnet Mask v v Page 59 Default Gateway v v Page 59 DNS1 v v Page 59 DNS2 y v Page 60 VoIP Status VoIP Status Line No v v Page 60 Phone Number v v Page 60 VolP Status v v Page 61 1 The access levels are abbreviated as follows U User A Administrator A check mark indicates that the setting is available for that access level 40 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 1 Web User Interface Setting List Network Access Menu Item Section Title Setting Leve Ref U A Basic Network Connection Mode Connection Mode s Page 62 SST DHCP Settings Host Name v Page 62 Domain Name Server vo vi Page 63 Static Settings Static IP Address ve jf vw Page 63 Subnet Mask vey v Page 64 Default Gateway vil vi Page 64 DNS1 ve vw Page 64 DNS2 ve vw Page 65 Ethernet Port Link Spee
262. this URL it will be replaced with the unit s MAC address in upper case e If MODEL is included in this URL it will be replaced with the unit s model name e H fwver is included in this URL it will be replaced with either FIRM_VER_EUDECT or FIRM_VER_USDECT depending on the system Note that this rule differs from other parameters such as SIP_USER_AGENT Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Firmware File URL Page 119 4 3 5 Provisioning Settings OPTION66_ENABLE Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to enable the unit to look for option 66 to receive the TFTP server address or FQDN from the DHCP server Note e The unit will try to download configuration files through the TFTP server the IP address or FQDN of which is specified in the option number 66 field Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 143 4 3 5 Provisioning Settings Default Value H PROVISION_ENABLE Value Format Boolean Value Range e Y Enable option 66 e WN Disable option 66 Description Specifies whether the unit is automatically configured by downloading the configuration files from the provisioning server of your phone system Value Range e Y Enable configuration file download e N Disable configuration file download Default Value Y Web User Interface Reference Enable Provis
263. this operation from the base unit or one of the handsets To perform Reset Web ID Password In cases when buttons soft key icons are shown in English alphabet 1 Base unit MENU middle soft key 7 3 9 Handset MENU center of joystick gt 7 3 9 2 Y A Select Yes SELECT All the IDs and passwords are reset and the base unit will restart In cases when buttons soft key icons are shown in symbols pictures 1 Base unit middle soft key 7 3 9 Handset center of joystick gt 7 3 9 2 V a Select Yes gt OY All the IDs and passwords are reset and the base unit will restart Notice Once you press 7 3 9 Reset Web ID Password is performed immediately and without asking for confirmation regardless of the communication status As a result the base unit is disconnected from the IP network immediately For security reasons it is recommended that the passwords are set again immediately gt see 3 5 2 Administrator Password or 3 5 3 Change User Password Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 Section 3 Web User Interface Programming This section provides information about the settings available in the Web user interface Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 39 3 1 Web User Interface Setting List 3 1 Web User Interface Setting List The following tables show all the settings that you can configure from the Web user interface and
264. tication dialog box the Change User Password screen is displayed automatically to make the user set a password Configuration File Reference USER_PASS Page 135 Confirm New Password Description Specifies the same password that you entered in New Password for confirmation Value Range 6 16 characters except amp lt gt and space Note e This value must be the same as the value entered in New Password Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 75 3 5 4 Web Server Settings Default Value Not stored Configuration File Reference USER_PASS Page 135 3 5 4 Web Server Settings This screen allows you to change the Web server settings Panasonic KX TGP550T04 Status Network System VoIP Telephone Maintenance eee et Web Server Settings Web Port Close System Web Server Settings Web Server Port 80 80 1024 49151 Change User Password EEN 30 minute s 1 1440 web server Settings Time Adjust Settings Save Cancel 3 5 4 1 Web Server Settings Web Server Port Description Specifies the port number used by the Web server Value Range 80 1024 49151 Note e You cannot specify here the same port number as any of the port numbers specified for the individual lines in Source Port in 3 6 2 5 SIP Source Port Default Value 80 Note e When you change the default value of the port number to a value other than 80 su
265. to Resync Page 122 CFG_CYCLIC_INTVL Value Format Integer Description Specifies the interval in minutes between periodic checks for updates of the configuration files Value Range 1 40320 Default Value 10080 Web User Interface Reference Resync Interval Page 122 CFG_RTRY_INTVL Value Format Integer Description Specifies the period of time in minutes that the unit will retry checking for an update of the configuration files after a configuration file access error has occurred Note e This setting is available only when CFG_CYCLIC is set to Y Value Range 1 1440 Default Value 30 CFG_RESYNC_TIME Value Format String Description Specifies the time hour minute that the unit checks for updates of configuration files Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 149 4 4 1 IP Settings Value Range 00 00 23 59 Note e Ifthe value for this setting is any valid value other than an empty string the unit downloads the configuration files at the fixed time and the settings specified in CFG CYCLIC CFG _CYCLIC_INTVL and CFG_RTRY_INTVL are disabled e Ifthe value for this setting is an empty string downloading the configuration files at the fixed time are disabled Default Value Empty string CFG_RESYNC_FROM_SIP Value Format String Description Specifies the value of the E
266. to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written 240 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE lt lt thttpd gt gt The thttpd software that ACME Labs developed is contained and this product shall be used subject to the following license conditions Copyright 1995 1998 1999 2000 by Jef Poskanzer lt jef acme com gt All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in bi
267. to use the other SIP servers via the DNS SRV and A records e If set to N the unit will not try to use the other SIP servers Default Value SIP_FOVR_MAX_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example SIP_FOVR_MAX 1 SIP_FOVR_MAX 2 SIP_FOVR_MAX 8 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the maximum number of servers including the first normal server used in the fail over process Value Range 1 4 Default Value 2 SIP_DNSSRV_ENA 1 8 Parameter Name Example SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_1 SIP_DNSSRV_ENA 2 SIP_DNSSRV_ENA_8 Value Format Boolean Description Specifies whether to request the DNS server to translate domain names into IP addresses using the SRV record 186 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 4 7 2 SIP Settings Value Range Enable DNS SRV lookup N Disable DNS SRV lookup Note e If set to Y the unit will perform a DNS SRV lookup for a SIP registrar server SIP proxy server SIP outbound proxy server or SIP presence server e If set to N the unit will not perform a DNS SRV lookup for a SIP registrar server SIP proxy server SIP outbound proxy server or SIP presence server Default Value N Web User Interface Reference Enable DNS SRV lookup Page 86 SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_1 SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_2 SIP_UDP_SRV_PREFIX_8
268. tor Guide 19 1 1 5 Pre provisioning Prior Settings Item Description Setting DHCP server option 66 192 168 0 130 IP address range assigned by DHCP server 192 168 0 16 to 192 168 0 63 File name of the configuration file used for pre provisioning KX TGP500B01 cfg URL of the configuration file used for provisioning that is entered in the configuration file CFG_STANDARD FILE PATH http provisioning example com Panasonic Config MAC cfg Note MAC is replaced by the MAC address of the unit e g 0080F0123456 Stored location of the configuration file on the TFTP server Configuration file KX TGP500B01 cfg is stored in the directory tftproot To set up the server for pre provisioning 1 Start up the DHCP server and TFTP server and configure the settings as specified above 2 Connect the unit to the network and turn the power on a The IP address 192 168 0 16 is assigned to the unit by the DHCP server b The unit acquires the TFTP server address 192 168 0 130 from the DHCP server using DHCP server option 66 c The unit downloads the configuration file for pre provisioning from the TFTP server tftp 192 168 0 130 KX TGP500B01 cfg d The URL of the server where the configuration file for provisioning is stored provisioning server is set to the unit http provisioning example com Panasonic Config MAC cfg e When pre provisioning has compl
269. trator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 Section 8 Configuration File Examples This section provides examples of the configuration files Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 223 8 1 Simplified Example of the Configuration File 8 1 Simplified Example of the Configuration File The following listing shows an example of a simple configuration file For the programming instructions and allowable characters see 4 2 General Information on the Configuration Files Simplified Example 224 PCC Standard Format File DO NOT CHANGE THIS LINE This is a simplified sample configuration file HE HE HE HE FE FE HE HE HE FE FE FE FE HE E HE FE FE FE EHH FE FE FE FE E HE HERR HE FE EHH d FE FE FE E FE FE FE FE FE FE HE HE FE de Configuration Setting HEHE HE HE FE FE HE HE HE FE FE FE FE HE HE FE FE FE FE HE E HE FE FE FE FE HE HE FE FE FE FE HE FE HE FE FE FE d FE FE FE E FE FE FE FE FE FE FE EHH FE HH HH HE URL of this configuration file CFG_STANDARD_FILE_PATH http config example com 0123456789AB cfg HEHEHE HE FE FE AE HEHEHE HE FE FE AE E HEHE HE FE FE FE E HE HE HE FE FE FE FE HEHE HE FE FE FE FE HEHE HE FE FE AE FE HEHE HE FE FE FE AE EHE HE HE HH RH SIP Settings Suffix _1 indicates this parameter is for line 1 HEHEHE HEHE EHE EHE HEHE E FE E FE HE FE FE AE FE E FE E FEE FE EE FE FE AE FE E FE E FE E FE HE FE FE FE FE E FE E FEE FE EE FE HE E HH EHH RH IP Address or FQDN of SIP registr
270. u perform Reset Web Settings 2 1 5 Terminal Number Settings You can select the terminal number of the unit that you are using from Terminal 1 Terminal 9 and Auto The default setting is Auto Auto does not assign a fixed terminal number to the unit If multiple units try to access the same router simultaneously errors can occur Assigning a terminal number 1 to 9 to each of the units may prevent such errors To assign a terminal number to the unit In cases when buttons soft key icons are shown in English alphabet 1 Base unit MENU middle soft key 7 3 1 Handset MENU center of joystick gt 7 3 1 2 Y 4 Select the desired terminal number Auto Terminal 1 Terminal 9 gt SAVE 3 Base unit EXIT Handset OFF In cases when buttons soft key icons are shown in symbols pictures 1 Base unit middle soft key gt 7 3 1 Handset center of joystick gt 7 3 1 Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 37 2 1 6 Reset Web ID Password 2 Tell Select the desired terminal number Auto Terminal 1 Terminal 9 gt OK 3 Base unit C gt Handset A 2 1 6 Reset Web ID Password 38 Reset Web ID Password resets all the IDs and passwords required for users and administrators to access the Web user interface gt see Access Levels IDs and Passwords in 3 2 1 Before Accessing the Web User Interface to their factory defaults You can perform
271. uality of Service QoS 89 93 R Recommended Environment 48 Refresh Button 53 58 60 REG_EXPIRE_TIME_ 1 8 181 REG_INTERVAL_RATE_ 1 8 181 REG_RTX_INTVL_ 1 8 191 Registrar Server Address 83 Registrar Server Port 84 Related Documentation 2 Reliability of Provisional Responses 89 188 Reorder Tone 114 REORDER_TONE_FRQ 165 REORDER_TONE_TIMING 165 Reset 31 Reset to Defaults 122 Reset Web ID Password 38 50 Reset Web Settings 32 Reset Web Settings Button 122 Restart 123 Restart Button 123 Result Messages 53 Resync Interval 122 RFC2543_HOLD_ENABLE_ 1 8 174 Ringing Tone 113 RINGING_TONE_FRQ 164 RINGING_TONE_TIMING 164 Root Certificate 25 157 158 Router Setup 30 RTCP Interval 93 RTCP_INTVL_ 1 8 171 RTP Real time Transport Protocol Setup 30 RTP Packet QoS DSCP 93 Document Version 2010 03 15 Index RTP Packet Time 91 RTP Settings 30 91 130 170 RTP_PORT_MAX 173 RTP_PORT_MIN 173 RTP_PTIME 173 S Save Button 52 53 SDP_CKRTE O 4 1 8 168 SDP_CODEC 0 4 1 8 167 SDP_PARAM 0 4 1 8 168 SDP_PTYPE 0 4 1 8 168 SDP_USER_ID_ 1 8 192 Second CODEC 96 Secondary DNS Server 15 60 63 65 153 154 Secure Provisioning Methods 25 Security 90 Send SUBSCRIBE to Voice Mail Server 102 Service Domain 85 Setting Priority 28 Shared Call 105 176 SHARED_CALL_ENABLE_ 1 8 176 SHARED_USER_ID_ 1 8 177 Simplified Example 224 SIP Authentication 86 SIP extensions 89 SIP Packet QoS DSCP 89 SIP S
272. ue Format Integer Description Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP proxy server Value Range 1 65535 Default Value 5060 Web User Interface Reference Proxy Server Port Page 84 SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_1 SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_2 SIP_RGSTR_ADDR_8 Value Format String Description Specifies the IP address or FQDN of the SIP registrar server Value Range Max 127 characters IP address in dotted decimal notation or FQDN Default Value Empty string Web User Interface Reference Registrar Server Address Page 83 SIP_RGSTR_PORT _ 1 8 Parameter Name Example SIP_RGSTR_PORT_1 SIP_RGSTR_PORT 2 SIP_RGSTR_PORT_8 Value Format Integer Description Specifies the port number to use for communication with the SIP registrar server Value Range 1 65535 Default Value 5060 Web User Interface Reference Registrar Server Port Page 84 SIP_SVCDOMAIN_ 1 8 Parameter Name Example SIP_SVCDOMAIN_1 SIP_SVCDOMAIN 2 SIP_SVCDOMAIN 8 Value Format String Description Specifies the domain name provided by your phone system dealer The domain name is the part of the SIP URI that comes after the symbol Value Range Max 127 characters 180 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 4 7 2 SIP Settings
273. uel Bouyer All rights reserved Copyright c 1997 1998 The NetBSD Foundation Inc All rights reserved Copyright c 1997 1998 1999 2000 The NetBSD Foundation Inc All rights reserved Copyright c 1997 1998 1999 2001 The NetBSD Foundation Inc All rights reserved Copyright c 1997 1998 1999 2002 The NetBSD Foundation Inc All rights reserved Copyright c 1997 1998 2000 2001 The NetBSD Foundation Inc All rights reserved Copyright c 1997 1998 2001 The NetBSD Foundation Inc All rights reserved Copyright c 1997 98 The NetBSD Foundation Inc All rights reserved Copyright C 1997 2000 Sony Computer Science Laboratories Inc All rights reserved Copyright c 1997 2002 The NetBSD Foundation Inc All rights reserved Copyright c 1998 The NetBSD Foundation Inc All rights reserved Copyright c 1998 Todd C Miller lt Todd Miller courtesan com gt All rights reserved Copyright c 1998 1999 The NetBSD Foundation Inc All rights reserved Copyright c 1998 1999 2000 The NetBSD Foundation Inc All rights reserved Copyright c 1998 1999 2000 2001 The NetBSD Foundation Inc All rights reserved Copyright c 1998 2000 The NetBSD Foundation Inc All rights reserved Copyright c 1998 2000 2001 The NetBSD Foundation Inc All rights reserved Copyright c 1999 The NetBSD Foundation Inc All rights reserved Copyright C 1999 WIDE Project All rights reserved Copyright c 1999 2000 Jason L Wrigh
274. ut the forwarding destinations differ incoming calls are forwarded to the destination set on the server e If Call Forward has been enabled on the server incoming calls are forwarded to the destination set on the server even if you have selected No for this setting e You can synchronize the Do Not Disturb and Call Forward settings from the Web user interface gt see Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward in 3 7 3 1 Call Control or through configuration file programming gt see SYNCHRONIZATION ENABLE 1 8 in 4 7 1 Call Control Settings e Ifyou change this setting when Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward is set to Yes the change to this setting is not immediately applied on this screen In this case reload the screen to confirm that the change is applied Value Range e Yes es No Default Value No Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 109 3 7 3 Call Control Line 1 Line 8 Busy Phone Number Description Specifies the phone number of the destination to forward calls to when the line is in use Note If you change this setting when Synchronize Do Not Disturb and Call Forward is set to Yes the change to this setting is not immediately applied on this screen In this case reload the screen to confirm that the change is applied Value Range Max 24 characters Note e You cannot leave this field empty if Busy Enable Call Forward is set
275. vent header sent from the SIP server to the unit so that the unit can access the configuration files on the provisioning server Value Range Max 15 characters Note e Ifthe value for this setting is any value other than an empty string typically check sync or resync is set the unit will access the configuration files on the provisioning server when the SIP server sends an event to notify the unit e Ifthe value for this setting is an empty string the unit will not access the configuration files on the provisioning server even if the unit receives a synchronization notification of an event Default Value check sync Web User Interface Reference Header Value for Resync Event Page 122 4 4 Network Settings 4 4 1 IP Settings CONNECTION_TYPE Value Format Integer Description Specifies whether to assign the IP address automatically DHCP or manually static Note e This setting is available only when NW_SETTING ENABLE is set to N 150 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 4 4 1 IP Settings Value Range 1 DHCP 0 Static Default Value 1 Phone User Interface Reference Configuring Settings from the Base Unit KX TGP550 only Handset Page 15 Web User Interface Reference Connection Mode Page 62 HOST_NAME Value Format String Description Specifies the host name for the uni
276. w 52 Document Version 2010 03 15 Notes Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 249 Notes 250 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 Notes Document Version 2010 03 15 Administrator Guide 251 Copyright This material is copyrighted by Panasonic System Networks Co Ltd and may be reproduced for internal use only All other reproduction in whole or in part is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic System Networks Co Ltd Panasonic System Networks Co Ltd 2009 PNQX2113VA YM0709YS4030
277. y and handsets A maximum of 8 phone numbers can be assigned for each unit A maximum of 6 handsets can be registered to the base unit For details see 5 1 Line Settings for Base Unit and Handset Note e You can configure these settings even in the following cases The line has not been leased or the unit has not been configured yet 98 Administrator Guide Document Version 2010 03 15 3 7 1 Multi Number Settings The handset has not been registered yet or the connection with the base unit KX TGP550 only or handset has been disconnected Panasonic KX TGP550T04 Status Telephone Multi Number Settings l Line No Line 1 tine 0 BER 30 Line 4 30 Line 5 So Line 6 Kc Line 7 x0 Tone Settings ei Kai Network System VolP Telephone Maintenance Multi Number Settings Phone Number 1111111111 3333333333 4444444444 5555555555 gt Grouping Handset Handset selection for receiving calls Handset No Base Zi 42 43 da 15 gp iR d d v v v v v v F v d vi v v EI 72 m v v d v v v Vv E v d dl v v E v E lv v d v v v EI EA EI E v EI E E v EA d d bi ba d E Handset and Line No selection for making calls Line No oe NO XO XO XO NE NO 10 10 em Zi d d E E a a E EN 2 v v d d d E E SR 43 E EI 2 2 2 2 7 EN ZA YM Mi Et RI

Panasonic kx-tgp500 Cordless Telephone User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents